Panasonic DMR BS850 User Manual To The 36d93724 838f 42a0 817c B99d23f84257

User Manual: Panasonic DMR-BS850 to the manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 124 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Getting started
Title
Still pictures
- Still pictures
Music
- Music
Others
- Convenient functions
- Reference

until

2010/02/15

Dear customer

Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.

Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read the instructions completely.

Please keep this manual for future reference.

DVB and the DVB logos are trademarks of the DVB Project.

≥This Blu-ray Disc recorder is equipped with a Common Interface. It can receive encrypted and free-to-air DVB-S/S2 services.

≥The tuner in this unit is only compatible with DVB-S/S2.

Operating Instructions

Blu-ray Disc Recorder

Model No. DMR-BS850

DMR-BS750

Region management information

BD-Video

This unit plays BD-Video marked with labels containing the region code B.Example:

DVD-Video

This unit plays DVD-Video marked with labels containing the region number “2” or “ALL”. Example:

2ALL 35

Web Site: http://www.panasonic-europe.com

RQT9434-L

Basic

operations Quick Start

Guide

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 1 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Characteristics of this unit

Getting

started

Getting

started

Record with High Definition EPG

It is possible to record in high definition quality

when the broadcast is high definition. >7

Timer recording is made easier because the TV

Guide allows you to see programme information.

>23

Easy access to various functions

2 programmes Simultaneous Recording

You can access the main function quickly and

easily from FUNCTION MENU display. >13

≥FUNCTION MENU display

It is possible to record 2 programmes being

broadcasted at the same time by connecting two

satellite cables. >31

Network Connection VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”

You can access a selection of Internet services

from the Home screen with VIERA CAST.

You can also playback the video in the HDD of this

unit from DLNA compatible equipment on the

same network.

≥Enjoying VIERA CASTTM (>78)

≥DLNA feature (>79)

Operation of this unit can be controlled by the

remote control of the TV (VIERA) by connecting

with the HDMI cable to the TV (VIERA).

≥Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/

QLink) (>76)

≥Pause Live TV (>79)

About descriptions in these operating instructions

≥These operating instructions are applicable to models DMR-BS850 and DMR-BS750. The illustrations in these Operating Instructions show

images of DMR-BS850 unless otherwise indicated.

[BS850]: indicates features applicable to DMR-BS850 only.

[BS750]: indicates features applicable to DMR-BS750 only.

≥Pages to be referred to are indicated as “>±±”.

LandscapeWED, 27.05.2009

WED 27.05.2009 14:54

All DVB Channels

All Types

OPTION

Page Down

Page Up

+24 hours-24 hours Prog. Type Category

Time: 23:00 23:30 0:00 0:30 1:00

1 ZDF

2 3 sat

3 KiKa

5 ZDFdokuk

7 DKULTUR

6 ZDFtheat

4 ZDFinfok

Factory Tour Unser Auto

Ökosystem Savanne

PLATINUM/MARS Hier ist die Familie

Planète insolite

Kontakt mit der Polizei 24 Stunden

Sonderberichte

GUIDE

Hunter. \*Episode 5\*

Frankfurt Valley News

Bruder

23:00-23:45 Factory Tour

Wandern im Wald

Info

Select Channel

Select Programme

RETURN

Change display mode

TV Guide

Play Video ( AVCHD )

Play Pictures ( JPEG )

Play Music

Copy

View

Others

Play all Video

FUNCTION MENU

Blu-ray Disc / DVD

SD Card

USB

RETURN

Titles recorded to HDD can be viewed,

edited, or deleted.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)

HDD

Page 001/002

Delete TitleEdit Title

(Grouped Titles)

OPTION

20.03(Thu) Berge und Flüsse

Ausgebildet in der Antarktis

Wirtschafts-News

Soccer Digest

Die Rückkehr der Zombies

ZDF

Helicopter Informationen

Ausgebildet in der Antarktis

DV 21.02.02

04.10(Sat)

29.10(Wed)

29.10(Wed) Start Time 22:46 Rec Time0:01(DR)

29.10(Wed)

01.01(Thu)

ZDF

KiKa

3 sat

ZDFdokuk

KiKa

PLAY

RETURN

Select

Social/Economi

Sports Video (AVCHD)MovieNot Viewed

All

Previous Next

Blu-ray

Select a

function.

You can access

selected function

easily.

DIGA

Internet

DLNA compatible

equipment

VIERA

DIGA

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 2 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Getting

started

Included accessories

∫The remote control information

Batteries

≥Insert so the poles (i and j) match those in the remote control.

≥Use alkaline or manganese batteries.

≥Do not mix old and new batteries.

≥Do not use different types at the same time.

≥Do not heat or expose to flame.

≥Do not leave the battery(ies) in an automobile exposed to direct

sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows closed.

≥Do not take apart or short circuit.

≥Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.

≥Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.

Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can

damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.

Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long

period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.

Use

The distance and angles are an approximate.

Please check and identify the supplied accessories.

(Product numbers correct as of September 2009. These may be subject to change.)

∏

(N2QAYB000338)

∏ ∏

1 Remote control 2 Batteries

for remote control 1 AC mains lead

For use with this unit only. Do not use it with

other equipment.

Also, do not use cords for other equipment with

this unit.

R6/LR6, AA

30 20

Remote control signal sensor

7 m directly in front of the unit

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 3 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Table of contents

Getting started

Characteristics of this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Included accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Quick Start Guide

HDD and disc information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Regarding Blu-ray Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Recording high definition programmes and copying . . . . . . . . . . . 7

HDD and discs you can use for recording and play . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Discs that cannot be played . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

USB memory and card information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

USB memories you can use on this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Cards you can use on this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Control reference guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

The unit’s display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Easy access to various functions

— FUNCTION MENU display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Media handling (Disc/USB memory/SD card) . . . . . . . . 15

Inserting discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Inserting, removing the USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Inserting, removing the SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Disc and card care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

STEP 1 Inserting the CAM

(Conditional Access Module) and Smart Card . . . . . . 16

STEP 2Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

STEP 3Channel reception settings and TV aspect

settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

STEP 4 Setting the CI or CI Plus

(Common Interface). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Basic operations

Watching digital broadcasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Playing BD-Video or DVD-Video/

Playing recorded video contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Playing BD-Video or DVD-Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Playing recorded video contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Recording television programmes [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

To specify a time to stop recording

—One Touch Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Timer Recording using the TV Guide system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Deleting titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Deleting during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Copying titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Advanced watching digital broadcasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

To show subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Switching audio of the TV broadcast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

To select content in the digital broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

To show Teletext. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Title

Recording

Advanced recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Recording method and disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Recording modes and recording contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

2 programmes simultaneous recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Types of recording data for copyright protected titles . . . . . . . . . 31

Important notes for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Operation during Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Advanced timer recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Manually programming timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

To release the unit from timer recording standby. . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

To cancel recording when timer recording

has already begun. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Check, change or delete a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Operations in the TV Guide system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

TV Guide data download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Playing back

Advanced playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Operation during play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Display the subtitle during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Display the Teletext during play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play

—DIRECT NAVIGATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Switching of the Navigator [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Playback the title that was viewed once [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

To change the Genre Label [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

To play grouped titles [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

To edit the group of titles [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Playback of the High Definition Video (AVCHD) . . . . . . 43

Playback of the playlist created

on other equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Playing DivX® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Playing DivX video contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

To enjoy the BD Video which supports

BONUSVIEW or BD-Live [BD-V] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Playing secondary video (picture-in-picture)

and secondary audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Enjoying BD-Live discs with Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

To enjoy High Bit Rate Audio and Video . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Enjoying High Bit Rate Audio with 7.1ch speaker . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Regarding 24p output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Editing

Editing titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Title operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Create/Playback/Edit of the Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Create Chapter Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Editing and playing chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Chapter operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Copying

Copying titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Copy Title Playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Copying using the copying list—Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW

(DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

With Other Equipment

Recording broadcasts from external equipment . . . . .59

Recording from Set Top Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

Linked timer recordings with external equipment (Set Top Box)

— EXT LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

Copying from a video equipment

(video cassette recorder, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

DV Automatic Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Flexible Recording via AV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Copy the HD Video (AVCHD format)

or the SD Video (MPEG2 format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Copying HD Video (AVCHD format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Copying SD Video (MPEG2 format). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 4 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Reference Convenient

functions Music Still pictures With Other

Equipment Getting

started

Quick Start

Guide

Basic

operations

RecordingPlaying

back

EditingCopying

Still pictures

Playing still pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

Useful functions during still picture play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Editing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

Editing still pictures (JPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Still pictures operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Copying still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

Copying new still pictures on the SD card

—Copy New Pictures ( JPEG ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Copying all the still pictures on the USB memory

—Copy All Pictures ( JPEG ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Copying using the copying list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Music

Playing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Playing MP3 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Playing music CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Playing music recorded on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Useful functions during music play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Editing music/playlist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

Editing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Album and track operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Editing Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Playlist operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Copying music to HDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

About the Gracenote® Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Copying music from a disc or a USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Others

Convenient functions

Linked operations with the TV

(VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link). . . . . . . . . . . .76

Easy control only with VIERA remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Enjoying VIERA CASTTM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

To pause the TV programme you are watching

—Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

DLNA feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Playing back from

Panasonic DLNA compatible equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Playing back from

non-Panasonic DLNA compatible equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

Convenient functions to playback and

viewing or listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Using on-screen menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Switch the aspect ratio of the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Disc and card management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Setting the protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Providing a name for a disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Deleting all titles—Delete all titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Delete BD-Video data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Enabling the unit’s recording function—Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Selecting the background style—Top Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first

—Auto-Play Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Finalising—Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

DVB Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

HDD / Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Software (firmware) Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Update software (firmware) of this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

CI Plus compatible CAM (Conditional Access Module)

software (firmware) update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Other Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Television operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

HOLD function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Additional connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Connecting a television with AUDIO/VIDEO terminals . . . . . . . 100

Connecting a television with

COMPONENT VIDEO terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Connecting a stereo amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Connecting VCR or Set Top Box

(Terrestrial receiver, CATV, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal . . . . . . . . . 101

Connecting with an HDMI compatible

television and receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Network connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Reference

Operations that can be performed

simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Operations that can be performed while

recording or copying a title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Starting of the timer recording while executing

other operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

When removing a recorded disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Troubleshooting guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 5 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

HDD and disc information

Quick Start

Guide

This unit can record or copy to the following HDD or discs.

The Blu-ray Disc (BD-RE and BD-R) has a lot more recording capacity compared with the DVD.

When you compare the Blu-ray Disc (single-side dual-layer 50 GB) with the DVD-R (4.7 GB)

Blu-ray Disc can record the image of the digital broadcasting in the same quality as broadcasted. Therefore, high definition quality can be

recorded as high definition quality as it is.

You can record the programme of the digital broadcast to the HDD by using this unit’s tuner.

Recording by pressing [¥REC] button

It can only record to HDD by pressing [¥REC] in DR mode (>29).

Timer recording

It can only record to HDD when using timer record.

≥Discs can be recorded from the external equipment. Discs that can be recorded will differ depending on the recording method.

For details, please refer to “Recording method and disc” on page 29.

Regarding Blu-ray Disc

1.High volume recording

2.High quality recording

HDDHDDHDD

+R+R+R +R DL+R DL+R DL +RW+RW+RW

BD-REBD-REBD-RE

BD-RBD-RBD-R

DVD-RAMDVD-RAMDVD-RAM DVD-RDVD-RDVD-R DVD-R DLDVD-R DLDVD-R DL DVD-RWDVD-RWDVD-RW

Internal

REC

HDD

LandscapeWED, 27.05.2009

WED 27.05.2009 14:54

All DVB Channels

All Types

OPTION Page Down

Page Up

+24 hours-24 hours Prog. Type Category

Time: 23:00 23:30 0:00 0:30 1:00

1 ZDF

2 3 sat

3 KiKa

5 ZDFdokuk

7 DKULTUR

6 ZDFtheat

4 ZDFinfok

Factory Tour Unser Auto

Ökosystem Savanne

PLATINUM/MARS Hier ist die Familie

Planète insolite

Kontakt mit der Polizei 24 Stunden

Sonderberichte

GUIDE

Hunter. \*Episode 5\*

Frankfurt Valley News

Bruder

23:00-23:45 Factory Tour

Wandern im Wald

Info

Select Channel

Select Programme

RETURN

Change display mode

About 10 DVD-Rs

When a 2 hour movie is recorded (in SP mode)

About 1 movie

(per 1 DVD disc)

About 10 movies

DVD-R (4.7 GB) Blu-ray Disc

(50 GB: single-side dual-layer)

Broadcasted images can be recorded as they are

(When recorded in DR mode)

Broadcasted images cannot be recorded as they are

DVD-R, etc.

Blu-ray Disc

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 6 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Quick Start

Guide

This unit will record the high definition quality programmes§1 of the digital broadcast onto the HDD with high quality image and audio as it was

broadcasted. Perform the copy using an appropriate disc and recording mode for your purpose.

§1It will also record standard definition programmes of the digital broadcast with the same quality of image and audio as broadcasted.

§2Data size of the copied title may be larger than the original title, depending on the transfer rate.

It is recommended to use HE or HL mode when you record high definition and long programmes.

§3You cannot switch the subtitle on or off during the playback of the copied title.

§4You cannot operate the Teletext during the playback of the copied title. (>28)

Recording high definition programmes and copying

HDDHDDHDD

BD-RE

BD-R

BD-RE

BD-R

≥Record as high definition (HD) quality

≥All subtitles, multiple audio and Teletext are

recorded.

Programmes in high definition (HD) quality

Copy as it was broadcasted

≥Copy as high definition (HD) quality

≥Copy in High Speed mode

≥All subtitles, multiple audio and

Teletext are copied.

≥Copy as standard definition (SD) quality

≥Copy in Normal Speed mode

≥Only one subtitle can be copied.§3

≥Only one audio can be copied for the multiple

audio.

≥Teletext can be copied. [Copy Title Playing only

(>55)]§4

≥Copy as high definition quality with

compressed broadcast data.

≥Copy in Normal Speed mode

≥Only one subtitle can be copied.§3

≥Only one audio can be copied for the multiple

audio.

≥Teletext can be copied. [Copy Title Playing

only (>55)]§4

Copy in high definition for a long time§2Copy in standard definition

When copying titles to disc

≥Quality and speed of copy depends on the type of

disc being used.

Recording

DR mode

All Discs

COPY

DR mode HG, HX, HE, HL mode§2XP, SP, LP, EP, FR mode

Goal!

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 7 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

HDD and disc information

(≤: Possible, –: Impossible)

≥Recording modes that can be selected differ depending on the recording methods. For details, please refer to the respective operating.

HDD and discs you can use for recording and play

Disc type Hard disk drive (HDD)

Standard symbol [HDD]

Data that can be recorded and played Video/Still picture/Music

Quality in which video is recorded High definition (HD) quality/Standard definition (SD) quality

Recording mode in which video is recorded DR, HG, HX, HE, HL, XP, SP, LP, EP, FR

Rewritable ≤

Timer recording ≤

Recording of copyright protected titles (>31) ≤

Disc type BD-RE

(50 GB/25 GB) BD-R

(50 GB/25 GB)

Standard symbol [BD-RE] [BD-R]

Data that can be recorded and played Video/Still picture Video

Quality in which video is recorded High definition (HD) quality/Standard definition (SD) quality

Recording mode in which video is recorded DR, HG, HX, HE, HL, XP, SP, LP, EP, FR

Rewritable ≤–

Timer recording –

Recording of copyright protected titles (>31) ≤

Play on other players It can be played on the players compatible with BD-RE (Ver. 2.1) and BD-R.

≥BD-RE and BD-R that were recorded on this unit may not be played on other Blu-ray Disc

players, etc. Also, when programmes broadcasted in countries (France, New Zealand, etc.)

adopting the HE-AAC audio format are recorded in the DR mode, Blu-ray Disc Players

incompatible with the HE-AAC may not output audio recorded onto BD-RE or BD-R disc on this

unit while playback may be possible with those players. To playback titles recorded in DR mode

on this unit, please convert the recording mode. (>32, 50)

≥Playback of LTH type BD-R discs may not be possible with players that do not support the LTH

type format.

≥Single-side dual-layer (50 GB) disc can only be played on the compatible player.

Note ≥DL is also included.

“DL” is a single-side dual-layer disc.

≥BD-RE (Ver. 1.0) with a cartridge cannot be

used with this unit. (It cannot be used even if it

is taken out from the cartridge)

Use the BD-RE compliant to Blu-ray Disc

Rewritable Format Version 2.1.

≥DL is also included.

“DL” is a single-side dual-layer disc.

≥LTH type is also included.

≥For BD-R finalised with this unit or other

equipment, only playback is possible on this

unit.

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 8 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Quick Start

Guide

≥Recording modes that can be selected differ depending on the recording methods. For details, please refer to the respective operating.

[Note]

≥Discs recorded on equipment other than this unit may not be used for recording on this unit.

≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded

onto the HDD, BD-RE or BD-R.)

≥You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the recording.

≥Recording-restricted or copy-restricted programmes may not be recorded depending on the type of discs (including HDD) or recording mode.

∫Regarding 8 cm Disc

This unit cannot record or edit the 8 cm BD-RE, BD-R, DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R DL or +RW.

Only playback or copy to the HDD is possible.

Disc type DVD-RAM DVD-R DVD-R DL DVD-RW

Standard symbol [RAM] [-R] before finalisation

[DVD-V] after finalisation [-R]DL] before finalisation

[DVD-V] after finalisation [-RW‹V›] before finalisation

[DVD-V] after finalisation

Data that can be recorded and

played Video

Still picture Video

Quality in which video is recorded Standard definition (SD) quality

Recording mode in which video is

recorded XP, SP, LP, EP, FR

Rewritable ≤–≤

Timer recording –

Recording of copyright protected

titles (>31) ≤

CRPM (>118)

compatible discs only.

–

Play on other players [RAM] can be played back

on Panasonic DVD

recorders and DVD-RAM

compatible DVD players.

≥Finalisation needed for playback on other equipment.

≥[-R]DL] can be played back only on equipment compatible with this disc.

Note Take the disc out from the

cartridge to use the DVD-

RAM with a cartridge.

(TYPE1 cannot be used)

–

Disc type +R +R DL +RW

Standard symbol [+R] before finalisation

[DVD-V] after finalisation [+R]DL] before finalisation

[DVD-V] after finalisation [+RW]

Data that can be recorded and

played Video

Quality in which video is recorded Standard definition (SD) quality

Recording mode in which video is

recorded XP, SP, LP, EP, FR

Rewritable – ≤

Timer recording –

Recording of copyright protected

titles (>31) –

Play on other players ≥Finalisation needed for playback on other equipment.

≥[+R]DL] can be played back only on equipment compatible with this

disc.

≥[+RW] can be played back only on

equipment compatible with this

disc.

≥If the disc failed to play on other

equipment, we recommend you

create top menu (>86).

Note ≥[+R] [+R]DL] recorded with this unit or with another Panasonic DVD Recorder may be incompatible.

However, discs that are finalised are compatible and can be played.

≥8X Speed +RW disc is not supported.

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 9 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

HDD and disc information

§Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording.

≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating

instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.

≥Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.

≥BD-RE (Ver.1.0)

≥DVD-RAM that cannot be removed from their cartridges

≥2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm

≥3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring

≥DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded on another unit and not finalised (>118).

≥BD-Video with a region code other than “B”

≥DVD-Video with a region number other than “2” or “ALL”

≥DVD-Audio

≥HD DVD

≥DVD-ROM, +R (8 cm), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD, SVCD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD, Video CD, etc.

Play-only discs

Disc type Logo Standard symbol Uses

BD-Video [BD-V] High Definition (HD) movie and music discs

≥This unit can playback BONUSVIEW or BD-Live compatible discs.

(>46)

≥When playing a set of two or more BD-Video discs, the menu screen

may continue to display even if the disc has been ejected.

≥To enjoy High Bit Rate Audio and Video (>47)

≥Operation of this unit may become slower when the BD-J application

(>118) is executing. This is not malfunction.

DVD-Video [DVD-V] Movie and music discs

DVD-RW (DVD

Video

Recording

format)

[-RW‹VR›] DVD-RW video recorded on another DVD recorder

≥By formatting (>85) the disc, you can record onto it in DVD-Video

format.

≥It may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for

recording.

DVD-R

DVD-R DL DivX®, MP3,

JPEG ≥DVD-R§ and DVD-R DL§ with video recorded in DivX

≥DVD-R§ and DVD-R DL§ with music recorded in MP3

≥DVD-R§ and DVD-R DL§ with still pictures recorded in JPEG

CD [CD] ≥Recorded audio and music (including CD-R/RW§)

–DivX®, MP3,

JPEG ≥CD-R§ and CD-RW§ with video recorded in DivX

≥CD-R§ and CD-RW§ with music recorded in MP3

≥CD-R§ and CD-RW§ with still pictures recorded in JPEG

Disc with high

definition

video (AVCHD)

recorded by

Panasonic’s

video camera,

etc.

–[AVCHD] Following disc can be played.

≥BD-RE, BD-R, DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL,

+RW

≥Only the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R or +R DL which was

finalised (>118) with the same equipment that was used to record

can be played.

≥Set “Play Video ( AVCHD ) on BD-RE / BD-R” to “On” for the disc that

has high definition video (AVCHD) recorded by Panasonic’s video

camera, etc. and high definition quality title that was recorded on this

unit. (>89)

Discs that cannot be played

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 10 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Quick Start

Guide

USB memory and card information

USB memories can only be used for playback or copy to HDD or discs.

≥Despite meeting the conditions mentioned above, there may be USB memories that cannot be used for this unit.

[Note]

≥This unit’s USB port does not support bus-powered USB device.

SD cards can be used for playback, copy to HDD or discs or copy from HDD or discs.

≥When using SD cards 4 GB or larger, only SD cards that display the SDHC logo can be used.

≥Useable memory is slightly less than the card capacity.

≥Please confirm the latest information on the following website.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/

(This site is in English only.)

≥If the SD card is formatted on other equipment, the time necessary for recording may be longer. Also, if the SD card is formatted on a PC, you

may not be able to use it on this unit. In these cases, format the card on this unit (>85, 118).

≥This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card Specifications FAT12 and FAT16 formats, as well as SDHC Memory Cards in

FAT32 format.

≥SDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can only be used with other SDHC Memory Card-compatible equipment. SDHC Memory

Cards cannot be used with equipment that is only compatible with SD Memory Cards.

≥We recommend using a Panasonic SD card.

≥Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.

∫Setting the protection

Switch the write-protect switch to the “LOCK” position.

USB memories you can use on this unit

Compatible USB memories USB memories which are defined as USB mass storage class and digital camera that use PTP

protocol:

– USB memories that support USB 1.0/1.1 and USB 2.0 Full Speed/High Speed.

≥USB memories of up to 128 GB can be used.

≥USB memories that support bulk only transfer.

CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported.

≥Digital Cameras which require additional programme installation when connected to a PC are not

supported.

≥MTP (Media Transport Protocol) device is not supported.

≥A multi-port USB card reader is not supported.

Format FAT16 and FAT32 file systems are supported.

≥UDF/NTFS/exFAT file system is not supported.

≥Depending on the sector size, some files may not work.

≥Only the first partition on USB memories with multi-partition is supported.

Indicated in these instructions

by [USB]

Data that can be played DivX, MP3, Still pictures (JPEG)

Data that can be copied MP3

≥It can be copied to HDD.

Still pictures (JPEG)

≥It can be copied to HDD, BD-RE or DVD-RAM.

Standard Definition (SD) Video (MPEG2 format)

High Definition (HD) Video (AVCHD format)

≥SD Video shot with a Panasonic’s video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or DVD-RAM. (>63)

≥HD Video shot with a Panasonic’s video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD, BD-RE or BD-R. (>62)

Cards you can use on this unit

Type SD Memory Card§1 (from 8 MB to 2 GB)

SDHC Memory Card§2 (from 4 GB to 32 GB)

§1Including miniSD Card and microSD Card

§2Including miniSDHC Card and microSDHC Card

The card types mentioned above will be referred to as “SD card” in these operating instructions.

Indicated in these instructions

by [SD]

Data that can be played Still pictures (JPEG)

HD Video (AVCHD format)

Data that can be copied Still pictures (JPEG)

≥It can be copied to/from HDD, BD-RE or DVD-RAM.

Standard Definition (SD) Video (MPEG2 format)

High Definition (HD) Video (AVCHD format)

≥SD Video shot with a Panasonic’s video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or DVD-RAM. (>63)

≥HD Video shot with a Panasonic’s video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD, BD-RE or BD-R. (>62)

Instructions You can insert directly into the SD card slot.

≥A miniSD Card, a miniSDHC Card, a microSD Card and microSDHC Card must be used with the adaptor

that comes with the card.

Suitable SD cards

LOCK

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 11 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Control reference guide

Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.

1Turn the unit on or off (>18)

2Select drive (HDD, BD or SD) (>21)

Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].

3Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers or

characters (The character buttons may be used when operating

VIERA CAST contents.)

4To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, still

pictures or music (>25, 37)

5Basic operations for recording and play

6Show digital channel information (>27)/Programme information

within TV Guide screen (>38)/Show status messages (>83)

7Selection/OK, Select station from Channel List (>20)/Frame-by-

frame (>40)

8Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR, Top menu, Pop-up Menu (>21)

9Show OPTION menu (>48, 66, 73)

This menu is used when playing or editing titles and still pictures,

etc.

:Skip the specified time (>40)

;Colour buttons

Use in accordance with instruction on the screen.

<Recording functions

≥[¥REC] Start recording (>22)

≥[REC MODE] Change recording mode (>59)

=Show teletext (>28, 40)

>Show subtitles (Subtitles can be viewed if the digital broadcast

programme has subtitles.) (>27)

?Transmit the remote control signal

@Television operations (>99)

AChannel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system

(>22, 38)

BShow VIERA CAST (>78)

CInput select (TV, AV1, AV2, AV3 or DV) (>20, 22, 59, 60)

DShow Timer Recording screen (>35)

EExit the menu screen

FShow the TV Guide screen (>20, 38)

GShow FUNCTION MENU window (>13)

By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may access the

main functions (playback, recording, etc.) quickly and easily.

HReturn to previous screen

ICreate chapter (>51)

JSkip approx. 1 minute forward (>40)

KDirect TV Recording (>76)

LEXT LINK function (>59)

MShow on-screen menu (>81)

NSelect audio (>27, 40)

1Standby/on switch (Í/I) (>18)

Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In

standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of

power.

2Disc tray (>15)

3Connection for digital video (DV) camcorder (>60)

4Blue LED

≥It is possible to set the LED to turn on/off. (>92)

5Display (>13)

6Recording indicator

7Remote control signal sensor

8Connection for VCR, Panasonic’s video camera, etc. (>60)

9Open/close disc tray (>15)

:SD card slot (>15)

;USB port (>15)

<Channel select (>20)

=Start recording (>22)/Specify a time to stop recording (>22)

>Stop (>22, 39)

?Start play

Rear panel terminals (>17, 100–103)

Remote control

TIME SLIP

DISPLAY

STATUS

DIRECT TV REC

AUDIO

REC MODE EXT LINK

REC

TEXT STTL

CREATE

CHAPTER

RETURN

PLAY/x1.3

PAUSE

STOP

SLOW/SEARCH

SKIP

PROG/CHECK

PAGE

SELECT

INPUT



DRIVE

SELECT



DEL

MANUAL SKIP

EXIT

OPTION

VOL

abc

jkl

tuv

ghi

qrs

def

mno

xyz





























































Main unit

  

  

 



Pull to flip down the front

panel.

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 12 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Quick Start

Guide

1SD card slot indicator

This indicator lights up when an SD card is inserted.

2Linked timer recordings with external equipment indicator

3Copying indicator

4Disc indicator

This indicator lights up when a disc is inserted.

5Drive (HDD, BD or SD) indicator

Select “BD” for any discs. BD indicator will light up.

6Remote control signal indicator

This flashes when it is operated by the remote control.

7Main display section indicator

Current time/playback counter, various messages

8Playback indicator

9USB port indicator

This indicator lights up when a USB memory is inserted.

:Timer recording indicator

This indicator lights up when the timer recording standby is

activated.

You can access the main function quickly and easily.

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

≥The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

≥There are operations that cannot be performed when recording or

when there is no media inserted. Those items are disabled for

selection in such cases.

The unit’s display

PLAY

EXT-L COPY

SD USB

HDDSD



 

Easy access to various functions — FUNCTION MENU display

TV Guide

Play Video ( AVCHD )

Play Pictures ( JPEG )

Play Music

Copy

Others

Play all Video

FUNCTION MENU

Blu-ray Disc / DVD

SD Card

USB

RETURN

Play Video

Playlists

BD-RE

Play Pictures ( JPEG )

Blu-ray Disc Management

Select for playback of disc and formatting of disc etc.

Blu-ray

OK OK

View

Select an item. Press [OK].

≥You can access the main functions via either the above

operations or repetition of the above operations.

Play all Video (>21)

Play Video ( AVCHD ) (>41)

Play Pictures ( JPEG ) (>64)

Play Music (>71)

TV Guide (>23)

Copy (>26)

View (>20)

≥“View” is displayed when this unit is connected with the TV that

supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later. (>76)

Others

Timer Recording (>35)

Ext Link Standby (>59)

Flexible Recording via AV input (>61)

DV Automatic Recording (>61)

Network (>78)

Setup (>87)

Blu-ray Disc / DVD

SD Card

USB

Select an operation that can be executed with media such as

discs, SD cards, or USB devices.

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 13 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care

The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device

that is easily susceptible to damage.

As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.

∫The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust

Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be

possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains

socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.

∫The HDD is a temporary storage device

The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or

copying. It is recommended to save the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or CDs that they were copied from.

∫Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD

If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this

condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all

content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.

≥When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.

The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the

environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.

Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.

To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

≥Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.

≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the

instructions that came with the cloth.

Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and

viewing pleasure.

Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it

impossible to record or play discs.

Use the Lens cleaner (not included) about once every year,

depending on frequency of use and the operating environment.

Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.

[Note]

Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.

∫Setup precautions

≥Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling fan

and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.

≥Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to

vibration or impact.

≥Do not place on anything that

generates heat like a video cassette

recorder, etc.

≥Do not place in an area often subject to

temperature changes.

≥Place in an area where condensation

does not occur. Condensation is a

phenomenon where moisture forms on a

cold surface when there is an extreme

change in temperature. Condensation may cause internal

damage to the unit.

≥Conditions where condensation may occur

– When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from

a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or when

subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air directly

impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during operation) is

subjected to cold air, condensation may form on the inside of the

HDD and may cause damage to the HDD heads, etc.

– When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.

– During the rainy season.

In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit

adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until

condensation is gone.

∫Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or

breakdown

The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor, etc.

gets inside the unit.

∫While operating

≥Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The HDD

may become damaged.)

≥Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains

socket, or flip the power breaker switch.

While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or

movement due to rotation is normal.

∫When moving the unit

1Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the display.)

2Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket.

3Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx.

2 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock.

(Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating for

a short time.)

∫Indemnity concerning recorded content

Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or

edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a

case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).

Unit care

This unit

VCR

DO NOT

Lens cleaner: RP-CL720E

≥This lens cleaner may not be for sale depending on the region. Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is

empty.

Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the

unit.

Do not place the unit on

amplifiers or equipment

that may become hot.

The heat can damage the unit.

DO NOT

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 14 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Quick Start

Guide

Media handling (Disc/USB memory/SD card)

1Press [<OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.

2Press [<OPEN/CLOSE] to close the tray.

≥[RAM] It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side

of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc

and turn it over.

Inserting the USB memory

When the USB indicator (“USB”) on the unit’s display is flashing, the

USB memory is being read from. Do not turn off the unit or remove

the USB memory. Such action may result in malfunction or loss of

the USB memory’s contents.

≥Before inserting any USB memory to this

unit, ensure that the data stored therein

has been backed up.

≥Check the orientation of the USB

connector and insert it straight in.

≥Insert an USB device while the unit is

stopped, so the “USB” screen is

displayed. Select an item and press [OK]

to switch to the USB-related operations (>62, 63).

Removing the USB memory

≥Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory

straight out.

≥If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may

be damaged.

When the card indicator (“SD”) on the unit’s display is flashing, the

card is being read from or written to. Do not turn off the unit or

remove the card. Such action may result in malfunction or loss of the

card’s contents.

≥Inserting foreign objects can cause a malfunction.

Inserting the card

Removing the card

1Press on the centre of the card.

2Pull it straight out.

∫How to hold a disc or card

Do not touch the recorded surface or the terminal surface.

∫If there is dirt or condensation on the disc

Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.

∫Handling precautions

≥Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc

warping and unbalanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)

≥Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt

pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.

≥Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static

electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.

≥Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.

≥Do not expose the terminals of the card to water, garbage or other

strange things.

≥Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.

≥Do not use the following discs:

– Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels

(rental discs, etc.).

– Discs that are badly warped or cracked.

– Irregularly shaped discs, such as heart

shapes.

≥Do not place in the following areas:

– In direct sunlight.

– In very dusty or humid areas.

– Near a heater.

– Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature

(condensation can occur).

– Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.

≥To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases

when you are not using them.

Inserting discs

Disc With a Cartridge

≥BD-RE with a cartridge cannot be used with this unit.

(It cannot be used even if it is taken out from the cartridge)

≥Remove the DVD-RAM or 8 cm disc from the cartridge and

place it on the tray. (TYPE1 cannot be used)

Refer to the instructions on how to remove the disc from the

cartridge.

Inserting, removing the USB memory

Inserting, removing the SD card

Insert label-up.

ADAPTER

If you are using a

miniSD card, a

miniSDHC card, a

microSD card or a

microSDHC card, insert

it into the adaptor that

comes with the card.

Insert and remove this

adaptor from the unit.

Press on the centre of

the card until it clicks

into place.

Insert the card label up with the cut-off corner on the right.

e.g.,

miniSD

Disc and card care

The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no

compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a

problem with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no

responsibility and offers no compensation for any subsequent

damage caused by such loss.

Examples of causes of such losses are

≥A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a Blu-ray

Disc Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another

company.

≥A disc used as described above and then played again in this

unit.

≥A disc recorded and edited with a Blu-ray Disc Recorder or

computer disc drive manufactured by another company is played

in this unit.

DO NOT

DO DO NOT

DO NOT

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 15 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

STEP

Inserting the CAM (Conditional Access Module) and Smart Card

You need a Conditional Access Module together with a valid Smart Card and a subscription with the corresponding broadcaster.

1Insert the certified Smart Card into the commercially available CAM (Conditional Access Module).

2Insert the CAM into the CI (Common Interface) slot of this unit.

TV service encryption is automatically cancelled and the service can be viewed or recorded.

≥You can insert one or two different CAMs with Smart Cards into this unit.

However, it will not operate properly when two CI Plus compatible CAMs are simultaneously inserted.

∫PIN query

When you turn the unit on after inserting the card, depending on the card provider, a PIN may be demanded.

Enter the 4-digit code with the numbered buttons.

[Note]

≥Be sure to insert the CAM horizontally into the slot.

≥Do not insert the CAM and Smart Card upside down.

≥For more details, see the manual of the CAM and Smart Card, or consult the dealer.

≥The Common Interface supports the modules according to DVB Specification and CI Plus Specification.

≥Unplug the AC mains lead before you insert or remove the CAM with Smart Card. Remove it slowly.

10BASE-T/

100BASE-TX

LNB

IN 1

LNB

IN 2

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

AC IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

AV1

(TV)

VIDEO

RGB/S VIDEO





AV2

(EXT)

VIDEO

RGB/S VIDEO





COMMON INTERFACE

13V/18V

400mA max.

CI (Common Interface) slot

CAM (Conditional Access Module)

Smart Card

This unit’s rear panel

Adjust the position marks. Label facing upwards

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 16 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Quick Start

Guide

STEP 2Connection

≥Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.

≥Refer to “Additional connections” (>100) for connection using other terminals and connection with other equipment.

≥Refer to “Network connection” (>103) for connection network.

≥Confirm connections not listed below with your dealer.

≥Even when your television does not have an HDMI input terminal, you still can view only with the 21-pin Scart cable connection (5) (However,

functions such as the “HDAVI ControlTM” function cannot be used.)

Using a HDMI cable

When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital

video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to

1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.

≥This unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour, x.v.ColourTM, High Bit Rate Audio) technology (>118, 119).

≥Video sources converted to 1920k1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,

native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.

≥Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).

≥When outputting 1080p signal, please use HDMI Cables 5.0 meters or less.

[Note]

≥If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (>118) and

output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)

≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.

For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input

terminal (PC monitors, etc.):

Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)

Using a 21-pin Scart cable

You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television (>76).

You can enjoy high-quality viewing [standard definition (SD) quality] by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television (>119).

≥Set “AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (>94)

If the 21-pin Scart cable is connected with a Panasonic TV (VIERA), the following functions are available.

≥Direct TV Recording (>76)

≥Pause Live TV programme (>77)

Satellite cable

≥Connect both satellite terminals (LNB IN 1 and LNB IN 2) to the satellite dish when you want to record 2 programmes simultaneously or view

TV during recording.

≥Connect LNB IN 1 terminal to the satellite dish when you use only one terminal. (You cannot view if you connect only LNB IN 2 terminal.) In

this case, you cannot record 2 programmes simultaneously or view TV during recording.

≥Supply power from another device when you use 2 or more devices to receive satellite broadcast, because this unit does not supply power

when it is turned in standby.

When the unit is not to be used for a long time

To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off

[approx. 0.3 W (“Power Save” is set to “On”)]

Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI Control

” function

When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be possible.

[>76, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link)]

≥Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.

≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.

Recommended part number:

RP-CDHS15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHS30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHS50 (5.0 m), etc.

10BASE-T/

100BASE-TX

LNBLNB

IN 1IN 1

LNBLNB

IN 2IN 2

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

13V/18V

400mA max.

AC IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUTOUT

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

AV1

(TV)

VIDEO

RGB/S VIDEO





AV2

(EXT)

VIDEO

RGB/S VIDEO





COMMON INTERFACE

LNB IN

HDMI IN

1 2

Television’s rear panel

Satellite cable

≥Connect the satellite

cable if your television

has a built-in digital

satellite tuner. (It is not

possible to connect the

satellite cable directly to

this unit.)

To household mains socket

(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)

Fully wired 21-pin

Scart cable

(>below)

Cooling fan

AC mains lead

(included)

Connect only after

all other

connections are

complete.

HDMI cable

(>below)

Common Interface (CI) slot

In order to view or record TV

services, refer to “STEP 1 Inserting

the CAM (Conditional Access

Module) and Smart Card” (>16).

Satellite dish

This unit’s rear panel

[Required^setting]

≥Set “HDMI Video Mode” and “HDMI Audio

Output” to “On” (>93).

(The default setting is “On”.)

Satellite cable

(>above)

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 17 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

STEP 3Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings

1Turn on the television and select the

appropriate AV input to suit the

connections to this unit.

2Press [Í] to turn the unit on.

Language setting screen appears on the television.

3Press [3,4] to select the language

and press [OK].

Country setting screen appears on the television.

4Press [3,4] to select the country and

press [OK].

Dish Setup screen appears on the television.

5Press [3,4] to select the number of

cables to connect and press [OK].

(>22, About 2 programmes recorded simultaneously)

≥Two cables ( Same signal ):

Select this item when connecting two cables outputting

same signal to both LNB IN 1 and LNB IN 2.

≥One cable:

Select this item when connecting only one cable to

LNB IN 1.

Search Mode screen appears on the television.

6Press [2,1] to select the Search

Mode.

≥All Channels:

Search for all channels.

≥Free Channels:

Search for free channels only.

7Press [OK].

Auto Setup starts.

Searching Satellite # Searching Channels

≥These operations may take some time.

After Auto Setup is complete, the time information can be

obtained and Power Save setting screen appears.

8Press [3,4] to select “On” or “Off”

and press [OK].

≥On:

It will go into the Power Save mode when the power is

turned off.

≥Off:

It is possible to start quickly from standby mode.

The features of the power save function when the unit is in

standby mode are as follows.

§1“Unit’s Display” is fixed to “Automatic” in the Setup menu.

(>92)

§2“Unit’s Display” is changed to “Bright” in the Setup menu.

§3It is possible to startup and start recording within several

seconds.

–Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal, it

may take time to display the screen.

After Power Save setting is complete, TV aspect setting

screen appears.

TIME SLIP

DISPLAY

STATUS

DIRECT TV REC

AUDIO

REC MODE EXT LINK

REC

TEXT STTL

CREATE

CHAPTER

RETURN

PLAY/x1.3

PAUSE

STOP

SLOW/SEARCH

SKIP

PROG/CHECK

PAGE

SELECT

INPUT



DRIVE

SELECT



DEL

MANUAL SKIP

EXIT

OPTION

VOL

abc

jkl

tuv

ghi

qrs

def

mno

xyz

RETURN

EXIT

FUNCTION



,,,

Power Save On§1Off§2

Power

consumption Approx. 0.3 W Approx. 7 W

Start up time Not Quick Quick§3

Auto Setup

RETURN

Satellite

Progress 0% 100%

This will take up to 40 minutes.

Checking LNB1

Satellite

LNB in 1 LNB in 2

Press RETURN to skip Satellite installation

Searching Satellite

Checking... Checking...

RETURN

Power Save

Off

On: Minimises standby power consumption,

disables Quick Start function. Unit’s Display

is set to "Automatic".

Off: Enables Quick Start function.

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 18 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Quick Start

Guide

9Press [3,4] to select the TV aspect

and press [OK].

To stop partway

Press [RETURN ].

1Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2Press [3,4] to select “Others” and press [OK].

3Press [3,4] to select “Setup” and press [OK].

4Press [3,4] to select “Connection” and press [OK].

5Press [3,4] to select “Common Interface” and press [OK].

6Press [3,4] to select “Slot 1:” or “Slot 2:” and press [OK].

The features that appear on screen are dependent on the contents of the inserted CAM and Smart Card.

Follow the on-screen instructions.

≥On-screen instructions may not correspond to the remote control buttons.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

≥For more information about TV service, please contact your service provider.

[Note]

≥Other settings on the card, e.g. changing the password, can be adjusted in the Setup menu. (>94)

≥Depending on the card, in some cases its use together with this unit may be limited or not possible.

≥16:9:

When connected to a 16:9 widescreen

television

≥Pan & Scan:

When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,

side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture.

This setting may not work and the pictures

may be shown in the letterbox style

depending on the content.

≥Letterbox:

When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.

16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style.

When television picture appears, set up is complete.

16:9

Pan & Scan

Letterbox

4:3 TV

TV Aspect

16:9 WIDE TV

RETURN

∫If the clock setting menu appears (>95, Clock)

∫To confirm that stations have been tuned

correctly (>87, Channel List)

∫To restart set up (>87, Auto Setup)

STEP 4 Setting the CI or CI Plus (Common Interface)

Connection

RETURN

TV Aspect

Aspect for 4:3 Video

TV System

HDMI Connection

Component Resolution

AV1 Output

AV2 Settings

Common Interface Access

Video

576i/480i

PAL

4:3

16:9

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 19 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Watching digital broadcasts

Basic

operations

Refer to “Advanced watching digital broadcasts”

(>27).

This unit has the tuner which allows it to directly receive and record

digital satellite channels.

1Turn on the television and select the

appropriate AV input to suit the

connections to this unit.

2Press [Í] to turn the unit on.

3Press [INPUT SELECT] a few times

and select “TV”.

≥It will switch when the display disappears.

(It will switch faster by pressing [OK])

4Press [WXCH] to select the channel.

Everytime you change the station, digital channel information

appears automatically.

The length of time the digital channel information is displayed

can be changed. (>92, On-Screen Messages)

Unit’s display;

≥You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.

∫Select the station from Channel List

Selection of channel is made easy by creating a Favourite of the

channels you watch often. (>87, Favourites Edit)

After performing steps 1–3 (>left)

1Press [OK].

Channel List is displayed.

≥Press the “Red” button to select the “Category”.

≥Press the “Blue” button to change the sorting mode.

2Press [3,4] to select the station and press

[OK].

∫Select the programme to view using the TV

Guide

Selection of channel is made easy by creating a Favourite of the

channels you watch often. (>87, Favourites Edit)

After performing steps 1–3 (>left)

1 Press [GUIDE].

≥Some digital broadcast may not send programme information.

To select channel in Category.

1Press the “Blue” button to display the list of category.

2Press [3,4] to select the desired item and press [OK].

Operations in the TV Guide system (>38)

2Press [3,4,2,1] to select the programme to

view and press [OK].

≥This is displayed only when the programme currently

broadcasting is selected.

3Press [3,4] to select “View” and press [OK].

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

e.g., 5: [0] > [0] > [0] > [5]

15: [0] > [0] > [1] > [5]

115: [0] > [1] > [1] > [5]

1115: [1] > [1] > [1] > [5]

TIME SLIP

STATUS

DIRECT TV REC

REC MODE EXT LINK

REC

CREATE

CHAPTER

RETURN

PLAY/x1.3

PAUSE

STOP

SLOW/SEARCH

SKIP

PROG/CHECK

PAGE

SELECT

INPUT



DRIVE

SELECT



DEL

MANUAL SKIP

EXIT

OPTION

VOL

abc

jkl

tuv

ghi

qrs

def

mno

xyz



INPUT SELECT

EXIT

GUIDE

,,,



RETURN

Numbered

buttons

“Red” “Blue”

AV3

AV2

AV1

Input Selection

RETURN

Change

Select EXIT

All DVB Channels Sorting 1 2 3...

RETURN

Select

7 D

KULTUR

ZDFtheat

ZDFdokuk

ZDFinfok

3 KiKa

Category 123/ABC

2 3 sat

1 ZDF

LandscapeWED, 27.05.2009

WED 27.05.2009 14:54

All DVB Channels

All Types

OPTION Page Down

Page Up

+24 hours-24 hours Prog. Type Category

Time: 23:00 23:30 0:00 0:30 1:00

1 ZDF

2 3 sat

3 KiKa

5 ZDFdokuk

7 DKULTUR

6 ZDFtheat

4 ZDFinfok

Factory Tour Unser Auto

Ökosystem Savanne

PLATINUM/MARS Hier ist die Familie

Planète insolite

Kontakt mit der Polizei 24 Stunden

Sonderberichte

GUIDE

Hunter. \*Episode 5\*

Frankfurt Valley News

Bruder

23:00-23:45 Factory Tour

Wandern im Wald

Info

Select Channel

Select Programme

RETURN

Change display mode

Timer Rec Set

Timer Rec Edit

Timer Rec Cancel

View

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 20 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Basic

operations

Playing BD-Video or DVD-Video/Playing recorded video contents

Refer to “Advanced playback” (>39) for detail

information.

Preparation

≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit

the connections to this unit.

≥Turn on this unit.

1Press [<OPEN/CLOSE] on the main

unit to open the tray and insert a disc.

≥Press the button again to close the tray.

≥Play starts from the point specified by the disc.

2When a menu screen appears on the television

Press [3,4,2,1] to select the item

and press [OK].

≥Some items can also be selected using the numbered

buttons.

≥If you are instructed to press the “ENTER” button by the

menu screen or the disc’s instruction document, press [OK].

[BD-V]

To display Pop-up Menu

While playing

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

≥Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit the Pop-up Menu.

To display Top Menu

[BD-V]

While playing

1 Press [OPTION].

2 Press [3,4] to select “Top Menu” and press [OK].

While stopped

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

[DVD-V]

1 Press [OPTION].

2 Press [3,4] to select “Top Menu” and press [OK].

≥You can also press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to return to the menu

screen.

[Note]

[BD-V] You cannot playback while recording from external equipment.

Also, it will stop the playback when the timer recording from external

equipment starts during the playback.

[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

[-RW‹VR›]

You can quickly find the recorded titles and easily play them.

1Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the

HDD or BD drive.

The HDD or BD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.

≥Select “BD” for any discs. BD indicator will light up.

2Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

e.g., [HDD]

3Press [3,4] to select the title and

press [OK].

To show other pages

Press [:, 9].

Regarding DIRECT NAVIGATOR (>41)

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Playing BD-Video or DVD-Video

TIME SLIP

STATUS

CREATE

CHAPTER

RETURN

PLAY/x1.3

PAUSE

STOP

SLOW/SEARCH

SKIP

PROG/CHECK

PAGE

SELECT

INPUT



DRIVE

SELECT



DEL

MANUAL SKIP

EXIT

OPTION

VOL

abc

jkl

tuv

ghi

qrs

def

mno

xyz

,,,

OPTION

DIRECT

NAVIGATOR

, 

DRIVE SELECT

Numbered

buttons

Playing recorded video contents

Following screen is displayed when recordable disc is inserted.

Press [3,4] to select “Play Video” and press [OK].

It will go to step 3 (>below).

BD-RE

BD-RE is inserted.

Copy

RETURN

Play Video

e.g.,

Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)

HDD

Page 001/002

Delete TitleEdit Title

(Grouped Titles)

OPTION

Die Rückkehr der Zombies

Ausgebildet in der Antarktis

DV 21.02.02

29.10(Wed)

01.01(Thu)

ZDFdokuk

KiKa

PLAY

RETURN

Select

Social/Economi

Sports Video (AVCHD)MovieNot Viewed

All

ZDF

Helicopter Informationen

29.10(Wed) Start Time 22:46 Rec Time0:01(DR)

20.03(Thu) Berge und Flüsse

Ausgebildet in der Antarktis

Die Rückkehr der Zombies

Soccer Digest

04.10(Sat)

29.10(Wed)

ZDF

KiKa

ZDFdokuk

3 sat

Previous Next

DIRECT NAVIGATOR

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 21 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Recording television programmes [HDD]

Refer to “Advanced recording” (>29–32) for detail

information.

Preparation

≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit

the connections to this unit.

≥Turn on this unit.

1Press [INPUT SELECT] a few times

and select “TV” and press [OK].

2Press [WXCH] to select the channel.

≥To select with the numbered buttons. (>20)

≥To select the station from channel List. (>20)

3Press [¥REC] to start recording.

Recording will take place on open space on the HDD. Data

will not be overwritten.

≥When [¥REC] is pressed while a drive other than the HDD

is selected, it will automatically switch to HDD and start the

recording.

4To stop recording

Press [∫].

If the following screen appears

Press [2,1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

∫To pause recording

Press [;].

Press again to restart recording.

You can also press [¥REC] to restart.

(Title is not split into separate titles.)

∫About 2 programmes recorded simultaneously

There are the following differences during recording depending on

the number of antenna cables connected (>17).

(≤: Possible, –: Impossible)

§To view or record an encrypted broadcast, a CAM (Conditional

Access Module) with Smart Card valid for the broadcast is

required.

∫To record 2 programmes simultaneously (>34)

During recording

Press [¥REC] on the main unit to select the

recording time.

≥You can specify up to 4 hours later.

≥The unit display changes as shown below.

≥The unit turns off automatically after the time to stop recording is

reached.

≥This does not work during timer recordings (>23, 35) or while

using Flexible Recording via AV input (>61).

To cancel

Press [¥REC] on the main unit several times until the counter

appears.

≥The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording

continues.

To stop recording

Press [∫].

∫Refer to “Operation during Recording” (>34)

for detail information.

This operation will only record to HDD in DR mode.

TIME SLIP

STATUS

DIRECT TV REC

REC MODE EXT LINK

REC

CREATE

CHAPTER

RETURN

PLAY/x1.3

PAUSE

STOP

SLOW/SEARCH

SKIP

PROG/CHECK

PAGE

SELECT

INPUT



DRIVE

SELECT



DEL

MANUAL SKIP

EXIT

OPTION

VOL

abc

jkl

tuv

ghi

qrs

def

mno

xyz



INPUT SELECT





 REC

,,,

Numbered

buttons

REC1

“REC1” or “REC2” will light

Unit’s display

Stop Recording

Yes No

Recording of this programme is in progress.

To stop recording, select "Yes" or press STOP.

Stop this recording ?

Recording [ ZDF 1 ]

RETURN

Connection Broadcast

being

recorded

Second broadcast being

recorded or viewed during

recording

Unencrypted

broadcast Encrypted

broadcast§

Two cables

( Same signal ) Unencrypted

broadcast ≤≤

Encrypted

broadcast§

≤–

One cable Unencrypted

broadcast ––

Encrypted

broadcast§

––

When recording digital broadcast with subtitles, multiple

audio or Teletext

If a programme to record has subtitle, multiple audio or Teletext, all

subtitles, multiple audio and Teletext are recorded.

It can be switched while playing back the title.

To specify a time to stop recording—

One Touch Recording

OFF 0:30 ""# OFF 1:00 ""# OFF 1:30 ""# OFF 2:00

^" Counter (cancel) ,"" OFF 4:00 ,"" OFF 3:00 ,}

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 22 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Basic

operations

Timer recording

[HDD]

TV Guide system provides programme information only from the

digital broadcasts station displayed on the television like a TV

programme magazine.

Selection of channel is made easy by creating a Favourite of the

channels you watch often. (>87, Favourites Edit)

≥You can enter up to 64 programmes up to a month in advance.

(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)

Preparation

≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit

the connections to this unit.

≥Turn on this unit.

≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (>95).

[Note]

≥TV Guide does not work if the clock is not set correctly.

≥If “NTSC” has been selected for “TV System” (>93), the TV Guide

system cannot be used.

≥The receipt of the TV Guide system data is only possible via the

satellite input of this unit. The receipt of the TV Guide data via

externally connected Set Top Box is not possible.

≥To record an encrypted broadcast, a CAM (Conditional Access

Module) with Smart Card valid for the broadcast is required.

1Press [GUIDE].

2Press [3,4,2,1] to select the

future programme and press [OK].

≥Following screen is displayed when the programme

currently broadcasting is selected.

Press [3,4] to select “Timer Rec Set” and press [OK].

≥Confirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV

magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using

[3,4,2,1] (>35, step 3).

≥In order to make the timer recording work successfully, using

the TV Guide system, the start recording time and finish

recording time can be set to a margin of up to 10 minutes.

(>90, Start Recording Time, Finish Recording Time)

3Press [OK].

The timer programme is stored and the timer icon (red) is

displayed.

“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording

standby has been activated.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Timer Recording using the TV Guide

system

This operation will only record to HDD in DR mode.

TIME SLIP

STATUS

DIRECT TV REC

REC MODE EXT LINK

REC

CREATE

CHAPTER

RETURN

PLAY/x1.3

PAUSE

STOP

SLOW/SEARCH

SKIP

PROG/CHECK

PAGE

SELECT

INPUT



DRIVE

SELECT



DEL

MANUAL SKIP

EXIT

OPTION

VOL

abc

jkl

tuv

ghi

qrs

def

mno

xyz

,,,

EXIT

RETURN

GUIDE

OPTION

LandscapeWED, 27.05.2009

WED 27.05.2009 14:54

All DVB Channels

All Types

OPTION Page Down

Page Up

+24 hours-24 hours Prog. Type Category

Time: 23:00 23:30 0:00 0:30 1:00

1 ZDF

2 3 sat

3 KiKa

5 ZDFdokuk

7 DKULTUR

6 ZDFtheat

4 ZDFinfok

Factory Tour Unser Auto

Ökosystem Savanne

PLATINUM/MARS Hier ist die Familie

Planète insolite

Kontakt mit der Polizei 24 Stunden

Sonderberichte

GUIDE

Hunter. \*Episode 5\*

Frankfurt Valley News

Bruder

23:00-23:45 Factory Tour

Wandern im Wald

Info

Select Channel

Select Programme

RETURN

Change display mode

Timer Rec Set

Timer Rec Edit

Timer Rec Cancel

View

Timer Recording SAT 10.01 2009 19:1030:24 DR

Channel

3 SAT 10.01

Day/Date Stop

23:10 23:40

Start

KiKa

1998, Deutschland

Direktor “N Schmitt”

Prog.Type: Movie

Factory Tour

RETURN

Category/

AV Date/

Weekly

Input Name

HDD

Drive

Mode

[Prog.Name]

HDD

All DVB Channels

All Types

0:00 0:30 1:00

Les enfants, j’a



News

Unser Auto

Timer icon (red)

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 23 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Timer recording

∫To cancel a timer recording on the TV Guide

screen

1 Press [3,4,2,1] to select the programme in

the TV Guide and press [OK].

2 Press [2,1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

(“F” in the TV Guide disappears.)

∫To modify the timer recording on the TV Guide

screen

1 Press [3,4,2,1] to select the programme in

the TV Guide and press [OPTION].

2 Press [3,4] to select “Timer Rec Edit” and

press [OK].

(>35, step 3)

∫When the TV Guide displays the empty TV Guide

list

≥Some digital broadcast may not send programme information.

Set the timer recording manually (>35).

∫Manually programming timer recording (>35)

∫To set the daily or weekly timer recording (>35)

∫To release the unit from timer recording standby

(>36)

∫To cancel recording when timer recording has

already begun (>36)

∫About 2 programmes recorded simultaneously

(>22)

∫Notes on timer recording (>37)

Timer Rec Set

Timer Rec Edit

Timer Rec Cancel

View

LandscapeWED, 27.05.2009

WED 27.05.2009 14:54

All DVB Channels

All Types

Time: 23:00 23:30 0:00 0:30 1:00

1 ZDF

2 3 sat

3KiKa

3 KiKa

Factory Tour Unser Auto

Frankfurt Valley News

23:00-23:45 Factory Tour

The empty field

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 24 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Basic

operations

Deleting titles

[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

(You cannot delete items on finalised discs.)

≥A title cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make certain

before proceeding.

≥Title that is currently recording cannot be deleted.

≥Titles on the disc cannot be deleted in the following cases:

–While recording to disc

–While high speed copying

Preparation

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or BD drive.

Select “BD” for any discs. BD indicator will light up.

≥[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] Release protection (>84, Setting the

protection).

1While stopped

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

2Press [3,4] to select the title and

press the “Red” button.

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all

items you wish to delete.

≥Press the “Red” button again to cancel.

To show other pages

Press [:, 9].

You can confirm the titles that you have selected using the

option menu. (>49, Properties)

3Press the “Blue” button.

4Press [2,1] to select “Delete” and

press [OK].

The title is deleted.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

1While playing

Press [DEL].

2Press [2,1] to select “Delete” and

press [OK].

The title is deleted.

∫Available disc space after deleting

≥[HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM] The space deleted becomes available for

recording.

≥[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recording space increases only when the

last recorded title is deleted.

≥[BD-R] [-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase

even after the contents are deleted.

TIME SLIP

STATUS

DIRECT TV REC

REC MODE EXT LINK

REC

CREATE

CHAPTER

RETURN

PLAY/x1.3

PAUSE

STOP

SLOW/SEARCH

SKIP

PROG/CHECK

PAGE

SELECT

INPUT



DRIVE

SELECT



DEL

MANUAL SKIP

EXIT

OPTION

VOL

abc

jkl

tuv

ghi

qrs

def

mno

xyz

DRIVE SELECT

EXIT

RETURN

DEL

, 

,,,

DIRECT

NAVIGATOR

“Red” “Blue”

......

Title

Available disc space increases after

deleting any of these titles

Title Last title

recorded

Available

disc space

......

Title Title

......

Available disc space does

not increase even after

deleting

Available disc space

increases after deleting

Last title

recorded

Last title

recorded

Available

disc space

Available

disc space

Later recorded

titles

This space become available for recording after all the later

recorded titles are deleted.

Title Deleted

Deleting during play

Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)

HDD

Page 001/002

Delete TitleEdit Title

(Grouped Titles)

OPTION

Die Rückkehr der Zombies

Ausgebildet in der Antarktis

DV 21.02.02

29.10(Wed)

01.01(Thu)

ZDFdokuk

KiKa

PLAY

RETURN

Select

Social/Economi

Sports Video (AVCHD)MovieNot Viewed

All

ZDF

Helicopter Informationen

29.10(Wed) Start Time 22:46 Rec Time0:01(DR)

20.03(Thu) Berge und Flüsse

Ausgebildet in der Antarktis

Die Rückkehr der Zombies

Soccer Digest

04.10(Sat)

29.10(Wed)

ZDF

KiKa

ZDFdokuk

3 sat

Previous Next

DIRECT NAVIGATOR

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 25 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Copying titles

[HDD] > [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

(You cannot copy to finalised discs.)

≥About copyright protected titles (>31, 53)

1Insert a disc.

2Press [3,4] to select “Copy” and

press [OK].

≥Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.

3Set the copy direction.

1Press [3,4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].

2Press [3,4] to select “Source” and press [OK].

3Press [3,4] to select “HDD” and press [OK].

4Press [2] to confirm.

4Set the recording mode.

1Press [3,4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].

2Press [3,4] to select “Format” and press [OK].

3Press [3,4] to select “VIDEO” and press [OK].

4Press [3,4] to select “Recording Mode” and press [OK].

5Press [3,4] to select the mode and press [OK].

6Press [2] to confirm.

5Register titles for copy.

1Press [3,4] to select “Create List” and press [1].

2Press [3,4] to select “New item” and press [OK].

3Press [3,4] to select the title and press the “Red” button.

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you

select all necessary items.

≥Press the “Red” button again to cancel.

≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at

a time.

≥Titles indicated with “ ” can not be copied in high

speed mode.

≥To show other pages

Press [:, 9].

4Press [OK].

5Press [2] to confirm.

6Set other settings.

1Press [3,4] to select “Other Settings” and press [1].

“Subtitles”

(Only when copying titles in DR mode and the recording mode

other than High Speed is selected)

2Press [3,4] to select “Subtitles” and press [OK].

3Press [3,4] to select “Automatic” or “Off” and press [OK].

≥If “Automatic” is selected

Subtitle in the source titles will be copied.

≥If “Off” is selected

Subtitle in the source titles will not be copied.

“Finalise” or “Create Top Menu”

([HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] only)

2Press [3,4] to select “Finalise” or “Create Top Menu” and

press [OK].

3Press [3,4] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].

≥If “On” is selected

–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] After finalising, the discs

become play-only and you can also play them on other

DVD equipment. However, you can no longer record or

edit.

–[+RW] Create the Top Menu. Top Menu is a convenient

function. We recommend you create the menu before

playing a +RW disc on other equipment.

4Press [2] to confirm.

7Press [3,4] to select “Start

Copying” and press [OK].

8Press [2,1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK] to start copying.

To return to the previous screen in step 1 to 7

Press [RETURN ].

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.

(You cannot stop while finalising or creating Top Menu)

∫Copying list icons and functions (>57)

[Note]

≥Titles in the grouped titles and other titles cannot be registered

simultaneously.

≥Titles recorded using a different encoding system (PAL or NTSC)

from the TV system currently selected on the unit cannot be

copied.

TIME SLIP

STATUS

DIRECT TV REC

REC MODE EXT LINK

REC

CREATE

CHAPTER

RETURN

PLAY/x1.3

PAUSE

STOP

SLOW/SEARCH

SKIP

PROG/CHECK

PAGE

SELECT

INPUT



DRIVE

SELECT



DEL

MANUAL SKIP

EXIT

OPTION

VOL

abc

jkl

tuv

ghi

qrs

def

mno

xyz

, 

RETURN

,,,

“Red”

BD-RE

BD-RE is inserted.

Copy

RETURN

Play Video

e.g.,

Copy

HDD

BD / DVD

Source

Destination

Cancel All

Copy Direction

Copy Mode

Create List

Start Copying

HDD  BD / DVD

VIDEO High Speed

Select the copy direction.

RETURN

Information of the copy destination

- BD-RE

- Copy restricted titles can be

copied on to disc

Copy

Cancel All

Copy Direction

Copy Mode

Create List

Start Copying

HDD  BD / DVD

VIDEO High Speed

Create copy list.

Page 01/01

Size: 0MB

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

No. Size

New item (Total=0)

Title

( 0% )

RETURN

OPTION

RETURN

Page 001/001

Time

Rec time0:52(SP)

TitlesDate Channel Time Title Name

OPTION

Select

01.01

1:35

12:36

1:13

AV2

AV1

25.05 Soccer Digest 1

Create List Grouped Titles

HDD

12:36

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 26 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Basic

operations

Advanced watching digital broadcasts

There are various services included in the digital broadcasts

depending on the programme. You can confirm or set these services

with the following operations.

While stopped

Press [STATUS ].

1Channel and Station Name

2Programme name and Broadcast time

3Current category

4Change the category

5Encrypted broadcast

6Audio format (>below)

7Subtitle (>right)

8Teletext (>28)

9Multiple audio/Sub Channel (>28)

To switch information of the current programme and the next

programme

Press [2,1].

To show detailed information about the programme

Press [STATUS ] again.

To hide the information screen

Press [STATUS ] once or twice.

[Note]

You can also select the other channel by pressing [3,4] and [OK].

when the information screen is displayed.

∫Audio format of the programme

There are programmes that use Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital, or

MPEG audio formats with the digital broadcasting. You can enjoy

these audio format programmes in high quality by connecting to an

amplifier.

To set the output of the audio

Set either “Bitstream” or “PCM” for “Dolby D/Dolby D +/Dolby

TrueHD”, “DTS/DTS-HD” or “MPEG” in the “Digital Audio Output”

(>91).

Press [STTL ].

≥Press again to hide the subtitle.

Press [AUDIO].

≥Audio will switch according to the contents of the programme every

time it is pressed.

e.g.,

[Note]

You can not change the audio channel (L, R) when “Rec for High

Speed Copy” is set to “On”. (>90)

Digital channel information

1 ZDF

All DVB Channels

12:55

Change category

Bruder

0:50 - 2:30

Now

Dolby DEncrypted

For info press

 







MULTI

To show subtitle

Switching audio of the TV broadcast

deu

STEREO LR

(Dolby Digital)

STEREO L

deu (MPEG)

STEREO R

STEREO LRSTEREO L

deu (MPEG) deu (MPEG)

ZDF

41:03 DR

ZDF

41:03 DR

ZDF

41:03 DR

ZDF

41:03 DR

ZDF

41:03 DR

ZDF

41:03 DR

deu

(Dolby Digital)

deu

(Dolby Digital)

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 27 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Advanced watching digital broadcasts

When a programme of a digital broadcast includes audio signals,

subtitle and sub channel, you can use the following operations to

select signals.

1Press [OPTION].

2Press [3,4] to select the

“Multi Audio”, “Sub Channel” or

“Subtitle Language” and press [OK].

≥Multi Audio can also be selected with the [AUDIO] button.

(>27)

3Press [2,1] to select the setting.

≥When there is only one setting available, you cannot select

between items.

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

You can enjoy teletext broadcasting, including news, weather

forecasts and subtitles, if this service is provided by the

broadcasters.

When “ ” appears in digital channel information (>27)

1Press [TEXT ].

2Press [3,4], the numbered buttons,

or the colour buttons to select the

page.

Follow the instruction on the screen to select the page.

To show the sub page

(only when there are sub pages)

Press [2,1].

∫Change the Teletext mode

“Teletext” of the Setup menu can be changed to following modes.

(>92)

≥FLOF (FASTEXT) mode

Four differently coloured subjects are situated at the bottom of

the screen. To access more information about one of these

subjects, press the appropriately coloured button. This facility

enables fast access to information on the subjects shown.

≥TOP mode (in case of TOP text broadcasting)

TOP is a particular improvement of the standard teletext service

that results in an easier search and effective guide.

– Fast overview of the teletext information available

– Easy to use step-by-step selection of the topical subject

– Page status information at the bottom of the screen

≥List mode

Four differently coloured page numbers are situated at the

bottom of the screen. Each of these numbers can be altered

and stored in this unit.

To store frequently viewed page (List mode only)

During the page is displayed

1Press the colour button of the colour to store.

2Press and hold [OK].

To change stored pages (List mode only)

1Press the colour button of the colour to change.

2Enter the new page number with the numbered buttons.

3Press and hold [OK].

To exit the teletext screen

Press [TEXT ].

[Note]

The teletext function depends on respective stations.

To select content in the digital

broadcast

RETURN

Multi Audio

Subtitle Language

Sub Channel

Play Menu

Control Panel

Aspect

FUNCTION MENU

Drive Select

To show Teletext

P100

<<01 02 03 04 05 06 07 >>

Current

page

number

Sub page number

Colour bar

TELETEXT

INFORMATION

e.g.,

P100

101 200 400 888

The number changes to white.

Broadcast

e.g.,

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 28 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Recording

Advanced recording

Title

Recording

Recording modes that can be selected differ depending on the recording methods and discs.

∫Maximum number of titles that can be recorded

[HDD]: 999 titles (When continuously recording for long durations, titles are automatically divided every 8 hours.)

[BD-RE] [BD-R]: 200 titles

[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]: 99 titles on one disc.

[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]: 49 titles on one disc.

Picture quality or audio that can be recorded differ depending on the recording mode.

≥This also explains about copying or DR File Conversion (>50).

∫FR (Flexible Recording Mode)

You can set FR (Flexible Recording) mode when copying or recording from external equipment.

The unit automatically selects a recording rate between XP and EP (8 hours) that will enable the recordings to fit in the remaining disc space with

the best possible recording quality.

For example with a 90 minute recording to an unused DVD-RAM, the picture quality is adjusted to between “XP” and “SP”.

When recording to the HDD, picture quality is automatically adjusted to precisely fit a copied title on a 4.7 GB disc.

Recording method and disc

Recording method [HDD] [BD-RE]

[BD-R] [RAM] [-R]

[-RW‹V›]

[+R]

[+RW]

[-R]DL]

[+R]DL]

Using this unit’s

tuner

Recording by using [¥REC] button DR – – – – –

Timer Recording DR–––––

From External

equipment

Recording by using [¥REC] button XP, SP, LP,

EP –––––

Timer Recording XP, SP, LP,

EP, FR –––––

Flexible Recording via AV input FR FR FR FR FR –

DV Automatic Recording XP, SP, LP,

EP XP, SP, LP,

EP –

Linked Timer recording (Ext Link) XP, SP, LP,

EP –––––

Recording modes and recording contents

Recording mode DR HG, HX, HE, HL XP, SP, LP, EP FR (>below)

Quality that can

be recorded Quality same as

broadcasted

(HD quality and SD quality)

Quality produced by

conversion§1 of broadcast

data (HD quality and SD

quality)

SD quality only

Multiple audio Record all multiple audio Record only one audio§2

Subtitles Can be recorded Can be recorded§3

The subtitles cannot be switched on or off during playback.

Teletext Can be recorded Can be recorded [Copy Title Playing (>55) only]

You will not be able to switch between display/non-display or execute Teletext operations

in the recorded content.

Sub Channel Cannot be recorded in timer recording

Surround audio Surround audio as the

broadcast Surround Audio produced

by conversion of broadcast

audio format§4

Stereo audio

§1MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 encoding

§2Before copying or DR File Conversion, select the audio to record.

– “Copy” or “DR File Conversion”: Select the audio with “Preferred Language” in the Setup menu (>89).

– “Copy Title Playing”: Select the audio with “Multi Audio” in the Disc menu (>81).

§3Before copying or DR File Conversion, select the subtitle to record.

– “Copy” or “DR File Conversion”: Select the subtitle with “Preferred Language” in the Setup menu (>89).

– “Copy Title Playing”: Subtitle displayed during playback are recorded.

Press [STTL ] to display the subtitle.

Select the subtitle with “Subtitles” in the Disc menu (>81)

§4If the audio sampling frequency is not 48 kHz, surround audio is mixed and recorded in front LR channels. Audio will be output from two front

speakers only, even if you play it on 5.1 ch speaker connection.

Basic

operations

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 29 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Advanced recording

∫Recording modes and approximate recording times

Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated.

(The times provided on this chart are an estimate.)

§1Recording time of DR mode may vary depending on bit rate of broadcasting.

§2It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other.

§3When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode, you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R, +R DL or +RW

discs.

§4When “Recording time in EP mode” is set to “6 hours” in the Setup menu (>90).

The sound quality is better when using “6 hours” than when using “8 hours”.

≥[RAM] When recording to DVD-RAM using “8 hours” mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM.

Use “6 hours” mode if playback may be on other equipment.

∫Regarding recording time remaining

DR mode recording

Remaining time in the DR mode is calculated with a bit rate of approx. 14 Mbps. But the bit rate differs depending on the broadcast, so the

displayed remaining time might be different from the actual remaining time.

Other recording modes (title conversion or from external input)

This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which

may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.

If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording.

Recording Mode [HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [-R]

[-RW‹V›]

[+R]

[+RW]

(4.7 GB)

[-R]DL]

[+R]DL]

(8.5 GB)

[BS850]

(500 GB) [BS750]

(250 GB) Single

Layer

(25 GB)

Dual Layer

(50 GB) Single-

sided

(4.7 GB)

Double-

sided§2

(9.4 GB)

DR§1

(High Definition

(HD) quality:

estimated bit rate is

14 Mbps)

77 hours 37 hours

30 min. 3 hours

30 min. 7 hours

30 min. – – – –

DR§1

(Standard Definition

(SD) quality:

estimated bit rate is

5Mbps)

215 hours 105 hours 10 hours

15 min. 21 hours – – – –

HG 80 hours 40 hours 4 hours 8 hours – – – –

HX 120 hours 60 hours 6 hours 12 hours – – – –

HE 180 hours 90 hours 9 hours 18 hours – – – –

HL 240 hours 120 hours 12 hours 24 hours – – – –

XP 110 hours 55 hours 5 hours

15 min. 10 hours

30 min. 1 hour 2 hours 1 hour 1 hour

45 min.

SP 220 hours 110 hours 10 hours

30 min. 21 hours 2 hours 4 hours 2 hours 3 hours

35 min.

LP 442 hours 221 hours 21 hours 42 hours 4 hours 8 hours 4 hours 7 hours

10 min.

EP§3

885 hours

(664 hours

)441 hours

(331 hours

)

42 hours

(31 hours

30 min.

)

84 hours

(63 hours

)8 hours

(6 hours

)16 hours

(12 hours

)

8hours

(6 hours

)

14 hours

20 min.

(10 hours

45 min.§4)

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 30 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Recording

Possible combination for 2 programmes simultaneous recording

To perform 2 programmes simultaneous recording, 1 programme out of the 2 needs to be recorded to the

HDD in “DR” mode.

During the recording of an encrypted broadcast, you cannot view or record another encrypted broadcast.

[Note]

≥2 programmes simultaneous recording is not possible in following conditions:

–When “One cable” has been selected in Auto Setup (>18, 87).

–When a single satellite cable is connected to the unit (>17)

–2 programmes from the external input

–While recording from DV input, or executing “Flexible Recording via AV input”

–While high speed copying

–2 programmes on same channel cannot be recorded simultaneously by pressing [¥REC].

Titles recorded using CI Plus are copyright protected.

2 programmes simultaneous recording

This function can only be used when two satellite cables are connected to the unit (>17) and “Two cables ( Same signal )” has been

selected in Auto Setup (>18, 87).

To record both programmes

to the HDD

Digital broadcast

(DR mode)

and

Digital broadcast

external input

Types of recording data for copyright protected titles

Copying not restricted It can be copied for indefinite generations.

≥There may be a limitation with the types of disc that can be copied to. (>53)

One generation copy is

permitted There are limitations with the types of disc that can be copied to, and the number of copies. (>53)

≥Original data are deleted when the recording mode is converted. (>50)

Copying is prohibited Copy is not possible.

≥You will not be able to playback after a specific period has passed following recording.

≥Playback limitation can be confirmed with Properties. (>49)

≥Editing, other than Delete and Properties, is not possible. (>48)

≥Playback/record is not possible when "Automatic" in "Clock" is set to "Off". (>95)

HDD

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 31 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Advanced recording

Important notes for recording

16:9 image such as

wide broadcasting ≥When the “Rec for High Speed Copy” of the Setup menu is “On”

– Record from external equipment.

– Copy from the finalised disc (DVD-Video) to the HDD

≥When recording to [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]

≥When copying to [BD-RE] [BD-R] in HG, HX, HE or HL modes

≥When converting the recording mode from DR mode to HG, HX, HE, HL, XP, SP, LP, EP or FR modes

It will be recorded in accordance to the setting of “Aspect for Recording” (>90) in the Setup menu.

≥In the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”, recordings will be made or copied in 4:3.

–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] When the recording mode is set to “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

– When recording or copying to a +R, +R DL and +RW.

High Speed Copy Speed to copy the title recorded on the HDD to a disc differs depending on the recording mode of the title and the

disc to copy.

Title in DR mode

[BD-RE] [BD-R] Title can be copied at high speed.

Title in HG, HX, HE, or HL modes

[BD-RE] [BD-R] Title can be copied at high speed.

Title in XP, SP, LP, EP, or FR modes

[RAM] Title can be copied at high speed.

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

Title can be copied at high speed if “Rec for High Speed Copy” was set to “On” before the programme is recorded

to HDD from external input. (The default setting is “On”. >90)

But in the following cases, high speed mode does not work.

–[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode

–[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect

–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode

DR File Conversion “DR File Conversion” is a function that converts the titles in DR mode to other recording modes.

In general, Data size of a title will be smaller than the original title after conversion.

You can save HDD capacity by deleting the original title after conversion.

Playing the disc on

other players [BD-RE] [BD-R] Titles may not playback on other Blu-ray Disc player. (>8)

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

The disc must be finalised (>86).

It is necessary to finalise DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them. You can then play them

as a commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record or copy.§

§You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW. (>85)

[+RW] If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend you create top menu (>86).

Recording an

encrypted

broadcast

To view or record an encrypted broadcast, insert the CAM (Conditional Access Module) with Smart Card valid for

the broadcast in the CI slot in the rear panel of the unit, and set the CI. (>16, 19)

≥During the recording of an encrypted broadcast, you cannot view or record another encrypted broadcast.

Title DR

Title HL

Available disc space

Converting to other mode

Deleting the original data

CHG

ENTER

OFF

RETURN

T OP MEN U DISPL A

A.SUR R OUN

MONI

T OR MOD

PICTURE MODE

REPE

OPEN

DC IN 9V

 /I 

CD SEQUENTIAL

DISC

DOUBLE RE-MASTER





 /   / 

DISC EXCHANGE DISC SKIP



OPEN / CLOSE

2 3 4 5

Finalise

Play on other DVD equipment

Record to DVD-R, etc.

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 32 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Recording

Chasing playback

Playback from the beginning of the title in the HDD, while the title is

being recorded to the HDD.

Simultaneous rec and play

Playback the previously recorded title while recording onto the HDD

or timer recording onto the disc.

1Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the

HDD or BD drive.

≥Select “BD” for any discs.

2Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] during

recording.

“[” is displayed on the recording programme.

3Press [3,4] to select a title and

press [OK].

To stop play

Press [∫].

To exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

To stop recording

After play stops

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit the screen.

2 Press [∫].

[Note]

≥“Chasing playback” and “Simultaneous rec and play” can only be

used with programmes of the same encoding system (PAL/NTSC).

≥Depending on the state of the unit, playback may not be possible.

(>104)

Playing while you are recording

Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)

HDD

Page 001/001

Delete TitleEdit Title

(Grouped Titles)

OPTION

20.03(Thu)

04.10(Sat)

29.10(Wed)

29.10(Wed) Start Time 22:46 Rec time0:01(DR)

PLAY

RETURN

Select

Social/Economi

Sports Video (AVCHD)MovieNot Viewed

All

DIRECT NAVIGATOR

Berge und Flüsse

Ausgebildet in der Antarktis

Die Rückkehr der Zombies

Soccer Digest

ZDF

KiKa

ZDFdokuk

3 sat

ZDF

Helicopter Informationen

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 33 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Advanced recording

§This function can only be used when two satellite cables are

connected to the unit (>17) and “Two cables ( Same signal )”

has been selected in Auto Setup (>18, 87).

Operation during Recording

Check the

recording

programme

Press [STATUS ].

e.g., while 2 programmes simultaneous

recording

Switch the

input Press [INPUT SELECT].

Switch to

other

channel§

Press [WXCH].

≥Other operation (>20)

≥During the recording of an encrypted

broadcast, you cannot view or record another

encrypted broadcast. (>22)

Display the

recording

programme

on the TV

screen

It is necessary to display the recording

programme onto the TV screen to perform

operations such as pause.

≥If the input was switched:

Press [INPUT SELECT].

≥If the channel was switched:

Press [WXCH].

≥If the drive was switched:

Press [DRIVE SELECT].

To stop

recording It is necessary to display the programme you

want to stop on the TV screen. (>above)

Press [∫].

≥From the start to the end of the recording is

called one title.

To pause

recording It is necessary to display the programme you

want to pause on the TV screen. (>above)

Press [;].

≥Press again to restart recording.

You can also press [¥REC] to restart.

(Title is not split into separate titles.)

≥If paused while recording in DR mode, the

paused part may become a still picture for a

moment during playback of that programme.

Perform 2

programmes

simultaneous

recording

Record other programme with

steps 1–3 on page 22.

≥One of the 2 programmes needs to be digital

broadcasting recorded with DR mode.

≥Channel switch / input switch while performing

2 programmes simultaneous recording will

switch between the 2 recording programmes.

Recording programme

displayed on the TV screen

3 KiKa REC2

ZDF

REC1

Recording programme not

displayed on the TV screen

“REC1” and “REC2” will light

REC1

REC2

Unit’s display

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 34 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Recording

Advanced timer recording

Timer recording of the broadcast

Recording disc: [HDD]

Recording mode: DR

Timer recording from the external equipment connected to AV1, AV2

or AV3

Recording disc: [HDD]

Recording mode: XP, SP, LP, EP, FR

Selection of channel is made easy by creating a Favourite of the

channels you watch often. (>87, Favourites Edit)

≥You can enter up to 64 programmes up to a month in advance.

(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)

Preparation

≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit

the connections to this unit.

≥Turn on this unit.

≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (>95).

1Press [PROG/CHECK].

2Press [3,4] to select “New Timer

Programme” and press [OK].

3Press [2,1] to select the items and

change the items with [3,4].

≥Channel

Select the channel to record.

You can press the “Red” button (Category/AV) to change

“AV input”, “All DVB Channels”, “Free Channels”, “Radio” or

“Favourites1”, etc.

You can perform this operation when you select the box of

“Channel”.

You can also select channel with the numbered buttons.

≥Day/Date

You can select current date up to one month later minus one

day. You can select “Date” or “Weekly” by pressing the

“Green” button only when “Day/Date” is selected. Titles

recorded using the same daily or weekly timer are bundled

and displayed as a “group” in the DIRECT NAVIGATOR

screen (>41) except when using Auto Renewal Recording.

≥Start/Stop

Press and hold [3,4] to alter the Start (Start time) and Stop

(Finish time) in 15-minute increments.

≥Mode

Recording modes and recording contents (>29)

“XP”, “SP”, “LP”, “EP”, “FR” can be selected when “Channel”

is selected in “AV input”.

It will be fixed to DR mode if anything else is selected.

≥Renew (Auto Renewal Recording) (>36)

≥Input Name

Press [OK]. (>80, Entering text)

4Press [OK].

The timer programme is stored and the timer icon (red) is

displayed.

“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording

standby has been activated.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

∫Timer Recording using the TV Guide system

(>23)

∫To release the unit from timer recording standby

(>36)

∫To cancel recording when timer recording has

already begun (>36)

∫About 2 programmes recorded simultaneously

(>22)

∫Notes on timer recording (>37)

[Note]

≥To record an encrypted broadcast, a CAM (Conditional Access

Module) with Smart Card valid for the broadcast is required.

Manually programming timer recording

DEL

Channel Name Schedule Drive/Mode Space

RETURN

Page Up

Page Down

Turn

Timer Off

Total 0/64

Timer Recording 30:30 DRHDD FRI 23.01.2009 8:59

Delete

New Timer Programme

Timer Recording SAT 10.01 2009 19:1030:24 DR

Channel

1 SAT 10.01

Day/Date

Stop

23:10

Start

RETURN

Category/

AV Date/

Weekly

Input Name

HDD

Drive

Mode

All DVB Channels

[Prog.Name]

ZDF

HDD

Category/AV

Channel Name Schedule Drive/Mode Space

Timer Recording 30:30 DR

HDD FRI 23.01.2009 8:59

New Timer Programme



ZDF

Hunter.\*Episode 5\* FRI 27.03

22:20 - 22:30 HDD

Check for available space on HDD, etc., when the “!” is

displayed. (>37)

Timer icon (red)

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 35 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Advanced timer recording

Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer recording

list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].

1Press [PROG/CHECK].

2Press [3,4] to select the programme

and press the “Red” button.

≥The timer icon “F” (>37) will change from red to grey.

≥You cannot cancel timer recording standby mode as long as

even one timer icon “F” (red) remains in the timer recording

list.

≥Press the “Red” button again to activate timer recording

standby. (The timer icon “F” will change to red.)

[HDD]

If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly everyday or every

week using timer recording, the unit will record the new programme

over the old one.

This function can be used only when weekly recording or daily

recording is selected.

1Press [PROG/CHECK].

2Press [3,4] to select the programme

and press [OK].

3Press [2,1] to select “Renew”

column.

4Press [3,4] to select “ON” and press

[OK].

[Note]

≥If a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or

while playback is taking place from the HDD, or while copying, the

programme will not be overwritten. Instead the programme set for

recording will be saved as a separate programme, and this

programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto

Renewal Recording takes place.

≥When there is not enough space on the HDD, the programme may

not be recorded completely.

Press [INPUT SELECT] or [WXCH] to display the programme that

you want to stop recording on the TV screen while 2 programmes

are simultaneously recording.

1Press [∫].

e.g.,

2Press [2,1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

≥If you stop a timer recording, it will be cancelled. However, if

you have already set a weekly, daily timer recording, the

recording will start at the next scheduled time.

To release the unit from timer recording

standby

Auto Renewal Recording

To cancel recording when timer

recording has already begun

Stop Recording

Yes No

Recording [ ZDF 1 ]

RETURN

Timer recording of this programme in progress.

Stop this timer recording ?

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 36 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Recording

Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer recording

list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].

Press [PROG/CHECK].

Icons

∫To change a programme

Press [3,4] to select the programme and press [OK]. (>35,

step 3)

∫To delete a programme

Press [3,4] to select the programme and press [DEL].

∫To exit the timer recording list

Press [PROG/CHECK].

[Note]

≥Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer

recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.

≥Only 1 programme can be set to timer recording on the disc.

≥Timer recording will not be performed if the clock is not set.

≥If the “TV System” (>93) in the Setup menu was modified to

playback a disc or a title while on timer recording standby, return

the setting to original before the recording is started.

≥Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is

turned on/off.

≥Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when

playing. Depending on the state of the unit, playback may stop

when recording begins.

≥Timer recordings do not begin while copying in normal speed

mode.

≥The timer recording starts, whether the unit is turned on or off.

When the recording starts with the unit turned on, if you should turn

the unit off the recording status is not affected.

≥When you programme successive timer recordings to start

immediately one after the other, last 1 minute of earlier programme

will not be recorded unless it can perform 2 programmes

simultaneous recording.

≥If timer recordings overlap around the same time, some

programmes will not be recorded depending on the set timer

recordings. As for programmes with “ ” displayed on the timer

recording list screen, some portion or all of the programmes cannot

be recorded. Press [PROG/CHECK] to confirm. (>left)

≥It is not possible to simultaneously record multiple programmes

from encrypted broadcasts.

Starting of the timer recording while executing other operation

(>104)

Check, change or delete a programme

FRed: Timer recording standby is activated.

Grey: Timer recording standby is not activated.

[This programme is currently recording.

Part or all of the programme will not be recorded since

the programme is overlapping.

The disc was full so the programme failed to record.

The programme was copy-protected so it was not

recorded.

The programme did not complete recording because of

some reason.

Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording

(>36).

The timer recording of the encrypted broadcast is

overlapping another programme.

OK: Displayed if the recording can fit in the remaining space.

> (Date): For recordings made daily or weekly, the display will

show until when recordings can be made (up to a

maximum of one month from the present time) based on

the time remaining on the disc.

! : It may not be possible to record because:

≥there is not enough space left.

≥the number of possible titles has reached its maximum.

(>29)

≥programmes are deactivated.

Channel Name Schedule Drive/Mode Space

New Timer Programme

RETURN

Page Up

Page Down

Turn

Timer Off

Total 4/64

Timer Recording 75:15 DR

HDD

FRI 27.03.2009 21:41

DEL

Delete

KiKa

Factory Tour

ZDF

Bruder

ZDFdokuk

Bowling Biographie

ZDF

Duell des Nachmittags

WED 27.05

22:20 - 23:45

FRI 27.03

10:40 - 12:00

FRI

22:30 - 23:25

FRI 27.03

21:30 - 23:30

HDD

-->

24.04

HDD



Notes on timer recording

Not recorded

Programme

Recorded Recorded

Programme

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 37 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Advanced timer recording

Press [GUIDE] to switch between Landscape view and Portrait

view.

This function lets you display a TV Guide list sorted by programme

type (e.g. Movie, Sport) or Category (e.g. TV, Radio).

1From the desired programme type

Press the “Yellow” button to display

the list of programme type.

From the desired Category

Press the “Blue” button to display the

list of category.

2Press [3,4] to select the desired

item.

3Press [OK].

≥A list appears with all programmes of the selected item.

≥When you select the Landscape view, the unit displays

programmes in grey that do not belong to the selected

programme type.

[Note]

The broadcasters allocate individual programmes to topic areas.

This function does not work properly unless the information which

distinguishes the programme type and profiles sent from broadcast

stations is correct.

4Press [3,4,2,1] to select the

programme.

To return to the previous TV Guide list before you have selected

the programme type or Category

Select “All Types” of the programme type or “All DVB Channels” of

the Category in step 2. (>above)

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

≥TV Guide data is downloaded automatically while the unit is turned

on.

If the unit is turned off at the specified time, the TV Guide data is

downloaded automatically. (>95)

≥Depending on the state of the unit, data is not downloaded during

2 programmes simultaneous recording and the like.

≥You cannot download TV Guide data during recording when “One

cable” has been selected in Auto Setup (>18, 87).

Operations in the TV Guide system

Basic operations

Landscape view

Portrait view

To change channels Landscape view

Press [3,4] to select a channel.

Portrait view

Press [2,1] to select a channel.

The TV Guide list appears for this channel.

To view a programme

list for another day ≥Jump ahead 24 hours

Press the “Green” button to jump ahead

by one day.

≥Jump back 24 hours

Press the “Red” button.

You can only jump back to the current

date. Past information cannot be viewed.

When jumping, the selected time period

may deviate.

To browse through

the TV Guide list Press [WXCH].

To see programme

information

(Programmes with the

symbol)

Press [STATUS ].

Additional information (programme name,

programme duration, broadcast time,

description) is available for these

programmes.

Press [3,4] to scroll up and down.

To show other pages

Press [CH W] (Previous) or [XCH] (Next).

Press [STATUS ] again to return to the

programme list.

LandscapeWED, 27.05.2009

WED 27.05.2009 14:54

All DVB Channels

All Types

OPTION Page Down

Page Up

+24 hours-24 hours Prog. Type Category

Time: 23:00 23:30 0:00 0:30 1:00

1 ZDF

2 3 sat

3 KiKa

5 ZDFdokuk

7 DKULTUR

6 ZDFtheat

4 ZDFinfok

Factory Tour Unser Auto

Ökosystem Savanne

PLATINUM/MARS Hier ist die Familie

Planète insolite

Kontakt mit der Polizei 24 Stunden

Sonderberichte

GUIDE

Hunter. \*Episode 5\*

Frankfurt Valley News

Bruder

23:00-23:45 Factory Tour

Wandern im Wald

Info

Select Channel

Select Programme

RETURN

Change display mode

PortraitWED, 27.05.2009

WED 27.05.2009 14:54

All DVB Channels

All Types

OPTION Page Down

Page Up

+24 hours-24 hours Prog. Type Category

GUIDE

Info

Select Programme

Select Channel

RETURN

Change display mode

ZDFtheatZDFdokukKiKa

23:00-23:45

23:45-01:30

01:30-02:00

02:00-03:45

03:45-05:30

05:30-06:00

06:00-08:00

ZDFinfok

Factory Tour

Unser Auto

News

Healing Raum

Mythologie

News

Brot-Fabrik

08:00-10:15 Solar System

3 sat

Selecting the programme from the desired

programme type or Category

TV Guide data download

All Types

Movie

Entertainment

News

Sport

Children’s

Music

Art/Culture

Social/Economic

Education

Lifestyle

All Types

Prog.Type

All DVB Channels

Free Channels

Pay Channels

Radio

Favourites1

Favourites2

Favourites3

Favourites4

All DVB Channels

Featured Videos Panasonic Select

Web Albums

Weather

28°

London, United Kingdom

E 17

km/h

Setup

Bloomberg

XXX

7465.95

778.94

1442.82

-89.68

-9.47998

-25.15

TELEVISION 15min. delay

COMING

SOON

COMING

SOON

COMING SOON

Images are for illustration purpose, contents may

change without notice.

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 78 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Convenient

functions

Pause Live TV

You can pause the TV programme you are watching using this unit’s

tuner and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is

useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.

If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme

temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.

1When you want to pause the TV programme while

watching TV

Press [;].

2When you want to resume

Press [1](PLAY).

≥The programme is saved on the HDD in DR recording mode.

≥Programmes can be saved temporarily up to 8 hours on the

HDD. (This may vary depending on the HDD free space.)

Operation during Pause Live TV

[Note]

≥Temporary save is stopped in following cases.

– When save time exceeds 8 hours

– When save time exceeds 1 hour with no HDD free space

– When 2 programmes are recorded simultaneously

– When start time of a timer recording arrives§

≥The Pause Live TV function does not work

– The clock is not set.

– While 2 programmes simultaneous recording

– While watching a programme being recorded

– When DV is selected

– When a radio programme is selected

– During recording§

≥Titles that are copyright protected (Copying is prohibited) cannot

be viewed going back in time more than the allowed playback

period.

≥When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes while

the screen is being displayed the screen saver is displayed [only

when the “Screen Saver” in Setup menu is set to “On” (>92)]. To

return to the previous screen, press [RETURN ].

Only when “One cable” has been selected in Auto Setup (

18, 87).

You can enjoy the video saved on the HDD of this unit on DLNA

compatible equipment connected via a network.

For details regarding connection and operation of equipment

connected via a network, refer to their respective operating

instructions.

[Note]

≥You cannot playback the titles on other DLNA compatible

equipment from this unit.

≥Still pictures, music, and copyright protected (Copying is

prohibited) titles cannot be played back.

≥Editing is not possible. (Only delete can be performed from

Panasonic equipment)

≥Programme being recorded cannot be played back.

≥Playback via DLNA compatible equipment cannot be done when

this unit is in the following conditions:

–While simultaneously recording 2 programmes

–While playing back a disc

–While simultaneously performing High speed copy and recording

–While displaying the Setup menu

–While executing functions using a network, such as "VIERA

CAST"

≥There may be some video that cannot be played back on DLNA

compatible equipment depending on the equipment.

≥You cannot playback simultaneously from 2 or more items of DLNA

compatible equipment.

1Operate the playback equipment to

display the list of titles on this unit.

≥For operation of the equipment, refer to their respective

operating instructions.

2Press [3,4,2,1] to select the item

to playback (folder), and press [OK]

≥

Menu structure will be different depending on the equipment

connected to this unit. Select the contents by repeating the operation.

≥Control Panel is displayed once the playback starts.

Operation can be performed with [3,4,2,1], [OK], and

[EXIT].

≥Press [OK] if the Control Panel is not displayed.

≥Even with Panasonic DLNA compatible equipment, listing of titles

or playback method may be different.

In such cases, operate following the operating instructions of that

equipment, or following the instructions on the screen.

Select the title on this unit from the connected

equipment, and start the playback.

≥For operation of the equipment, refer to their respective operating

instructions.

To pause the TV programme you are

watching—Pause Live TV

PAUSE

HDD

Pause Live TV

Search Press [6, 5].

The speed increases up to 5 steps.

≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.

Pause Press [;].

≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart.

Quick View Press and hold [1](PLAY/a1.3).

≥Press again to return to the normal speed.

Slow-motion While paused, press [6] or [5].

The speed increases up to 5 steps.

≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.

Stop Pause

Live TV 1 Press [∫].

2 Press [2,1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

DLNA feature

∫Network connection (>103)

∫Register the DLNA compatible equipment to

this unit (>97, Register the DLNA compatible

equipment to this unit)

∫Network Settings (>94)

Playing back from Panasonic DLNA

compatible equipment

Playing back from non-Panasonic DLNA

compatible equipment

Control Panel

e.g.

Exit

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 79 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Entering text

[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [SD]

You can give names to recorded titles, etc.

The maximum number of characters:

§Title name for timer recording

[Note]

If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.

1Show Enter Title Name screen.

2Press [3,4,2,1] to select a

character and press [OK].

Repeat this step to enter other characters.

≥To delete a character

Press [3,4,2,1] to select the character in the name

field and press [;]. (The selected characters are

deleted.)

≥Using the numbered buttons to enter characters

e.g., entering the letter “R”

1Press [7] to move to the

7th row.

2Press [7] twice to highlight

“R”.

3Press [OK].

3Press [∫] (Set).

“Writing...” appears then the

screen returns to the Title view screen and so on.

To end partway

Press [RETURN ].

Text is not added.

For your reference

If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu

after finalisation or creating Top Menu (>86). When entering a title

name, the name that will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed

in “Top Menu Preview” window.

[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] Characters

Title ([HDD] [RAM])64 (44§)

Title ([BD-RE] [BD-R]) 254

Album of still pictures ([HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM])36

Album (Music) ([HDD])59

Track ([HDD])59

Artist ([HDD])39

Playlist (Music) ([HDD])59

Disc ([BD-RE] [BD-R]) 254

Disc ([RAM])64

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Characters

Title 44

Disc 40

[SD] Characters

Album of still pictures 36

Title (timer recording)

Select “Input Name” in step 3 on page 35.

Title

Select “Enter Title Name” in step 4 on page 48.

Disc

Select “Disc Name” in step 1 of “Providing a name for a disc”

on page 84.

Album of still pictures ([HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM] [SD])

Select “Enter Album Name” in step 4, “Editing still pictures

(JPEG)” on page 66.

Album (Music) ([HDD])

Select “Edit Album Name” in step 5 of “Editing music” on

page 73.

Track ([HDD])

Select “Edit Track Name” in step 5 of “Editing music” on page

73.

Artist ([HDD])

Select “Edit Artist Name” in step 5 of “Editing music” on page

73.

Playlist (Music) ([HDD])

Select “Edit Playlist Name” in step 5 of “Editing Playlist” on

page 74.

Enter Title Name

12345

ABC a

DEF d

GH I

JKL j

67890

bc

ef/-%

hi$

kl@

]

Space

Set

Delete

PQRSp

TUV t

WXYZw

qrs( )

uv{ } -

xyz

. , "':;



Top Menu Preview

RETURN

0 9



Standard Characters Other Characters

¡£¤¥

«¬ ®

µ¶· ¸

¿Á

ÔÕÖ

ÉÊË Ì

¦§¨©ª

¯°±²

¹º»¼½

ÃÄÅÆ

ÍÎÏ

×Ú

ØÙ Û

Space

ÝÞß

áà

çèéê

ñòóôõ

âãäåæ

ëì íî ï

ö÷ø ú

þý

û ü ÿ

Name field: shows the text you have entered

Press the “Red” button or

“Green” button to select

character type and press

[OK].

“Standard Characters”:

(>left, Alphabet characters,

etc.)

“Other Characters”:

(>below, Umlaut characters,

accented characters, etc.)

N O

J K L

P Q R S

T U V

7 7

Enter Title Name

12345

ABC a

DEF d

GH I g

67890

bc 

ef/- %

hi $

Top Menu Preview

Standard Characters Other Characters

Chapter 1_

Chapter 1

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 80 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Convenient

functions

Convenient functions to playback and viewing or listening

1Press [DISPLAY].

≥Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped,

etc.) and disc contents, there are some items that you

cannot select or change.

≥The menu is not displayed when playing still pictures.

2Press [3,4] to select the menu and

press [1].

3Press [3,4] to select the item and

press [1].

4Press [3,4] to select the setting.

≥Some items can be changed by pressing [OK].

To clear the on-screen menus

Press [DISPLAY].

§With some discs, you may only be able to make changes using

the menus (>21) on the disc.

≥The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot

change when there is no recording.

Audio attribute

Language

Using on-screen menus

Common procedures

Disc menu—Setting the disc content

Video [AVCHD]

The video recording method appears

Signal Type

[BD-V]

≥Primary Video

Video: The video recording method appears.

Soundtrack: Select the type of audio or language.

≥Secondary Video

Video: Select on/off of images.

The video recording method appears.

Soundtrack: Select on/off of audio and the

language.

Soundtrack§

[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [Except titles recorded in DR mode, or

copied from high definition video (AVCHD format)]

[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

[-RW‹VR›]

The disc’s audio attributes appear (>right, Audio attribute).

[DVD-V] [AVCHD]

Select the audio and language (>right, Audio attribute,

Language).

DivX

Select the soundtrack number.

Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only one

audio type.

Disc

Play

Picture

Sound

Other

Soundtrack

Subtitles

Audio Channel

Off

L R

Digital 2/0 ch

Menu Item Setting

Subtitles§

[BD-V] [DVD-V] [AVCHD]

Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (>below,

Language).

[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [Except titles recorded in DR mode, or

copied from high definition video (AVCHD format)]

[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

(Only discs that contain subtitle on/off information)

Turn the subtitle on/off.

≥Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.

DivX

Turn the subtitle on/off and select the subtitle number.

≥Subtitle number is displayed even if there are not multiple

subtitles.

≥You can select “Text” in the subtitle number while playing back

a DivX video file containing DivX subtitle text. DivX subtitles

text is displayed as a closed caption by selecting “Text”.

Multi Audio [HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [Titles recorded in DR mode, or

copied from high definition video (AVCHD format)]

Switch in the case of multiple audio.

Subtitle Language [HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [Titles recorded in DR

mode, or copied from high definition video (AVCHD format)]

Select the subtitle language in the case of multiple languages.

Subtitle Style [BD-V]

Select the subtitle style recorded on the disc.

Angle§ [BD-V] [DVD-V] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

Change the number to select an angle.

Audio Channel [HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] (Titles in recording mode other

than DR) [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [-RW‹VR›] and DivX

(>40, Changing audio during play)

Signal type

k (kHz): Sampling frequency

b (bit): Number of bits

ch (channel): Number of channels

ENG:

FRA:

DEU:

ITA:

ESP:

NLD:

SVE:

NOR:

English

French

German

Italian

Spanish

Dutch

Swedish

Norwegian

DAN:

POR:

RUS:

JPN:

CHI:

KOR:

MAL:

VIE:

Danish

Portuguese

Russian

Japanese

Chinese

Korean

Malay

Vietnamese

THA:

POL:

CES:

SLK:

HUN:

FIN:

¢:

Thai

Polish

Czech

Slovak

Hungarian

Finnish

Others

LPCM/ Digital/ Digital+/

TrueHD/DTS/DTS-HD/MPEG:

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 81 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Convenient functions to playback and viewing or listening

This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed.

Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that

can be selected will differ.

§It will work when “HDMI Video Mode” in the Setup menu is “Off”

(>93) and “Component Resolution” in the Setup menu is “576p/

480p” (>94) and playing [DVD-V].

Play menu—Change the play sequence

Repeat Play

[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [BD-V] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [CD] [USB] [AVCHD]

Items displayed depends on the contents of the playback.

≥All

≥Title

≥Chapter

≥Playlist

≥Track

Select “Off” to cancel.

Random (Only when playing music)

[HDD] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

While playing, press [3,4] to select “On”.

Picture menu—Change the picture quality

Mode

[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [BD-V] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [AVCHD]

Select the picture quality mode during play.

≥Normal: Default setting

≥Soft: Soft picture with fewer video artifacts

≥Fine: Details are sharper

≥Cinema: Mellows movies, enhances detail in dark

scenes. (This does not affect the titles in DR

mode.)

HD optimizer

[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [BD-V] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [AVCHD] and DivX

It will compensate the mosaic noise in the video and haze

around the characters precisely.

Progressive§

Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit

the type of title being played (>118, Film and video).

≥Auto: Automatically detects the film and video

content, and appropriately converts it.

≥Video: Select when using “Auto”, and the content is

distorted.

≥Film: Select this if the edges of

the film content appear

jagged or rough when

“Auto” is selected.

However, if the video

content is distorted as

shown in the illustration

to the right, then select “Auto”.

Sound menu—Change the sound effect

Sound Effects

[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [BD-V] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [CD] [USB] [AVCHD]

≥Re-master 1

≥Re-master 2

(Discs record at 48 kHz or less)

This feature gives you a more natural sound by adding higher

frequency signals not recorded on the track.

≥This function is effective for audio from the HDMI terminal or

the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal only when “Dolby D/Dolby

D +/Dolby TrueHD”, “DTS/DTS-HD” or “MPEG” is set to

“PCM” (>91). (However, in this case, audio is output as 2ch

from the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.)

Dialogue Enhancer

[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [BD-V] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [AVCHD] and DivX

(3-channel or over only, including a centre channel)

The volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue

easier to hear.

Other menu—Change the display position

Position

[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [BD-V] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [CD] [USB] [SD] [AVCHD] and DivX

Change where this menu screen appears on your TV.

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 82 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Convenient

functions

Status of this unit during recording or playback can be displayed with

the following operation.

The status message will differ depending on the media or status of

this unit.

Press [STATUS ].

The display changes each time you press the button.

AStatus of this unit is displayed.

e.g.,

1Selected drive status/type of disc or USB memory

2Recording status/the remaining time/play status

Channel

4The name of the station

5Recording in background/copy progress indicator (When

recording 2 programmes simultaneously.)

BDetailed status of this unit is displayed.

e.g.,

≥When using Pause Live TV

1Date and time

2Available recording time and recording mode

3Title number and elapsed time during play and recording mode

4Title number and elapsed time during recording and recording

mode

5Current play position

6Total time

7Current time

8The time when the picture currently displayed on the television

was broadcasted

CStatus of the broadcast being received is displayed. (>27)

When black bars are shown at the top, bottom, left, and right sides of

the screen, you can enlarge the image to fill the screen.

1Press [OPTION].

2Press [3,4] to select “Aspect” and

press [OK].

3Press [2,1] to select the item.

≥Normal:

Normal output

≥Side cut:

The black bars on the right and left sides of the 16:9 image

disappear and the image is enlarged. Please note that the

right and left sides of the image are cut off when the black

bar is not displayed.

§Only when “TV Aspect” (>92) is set to “Letterbox”.

≥Zoom:

The black bars on the top and bottom sides of the 4:3 image

disappear and the image is enlarged. Please note that the

top and bottom sides of the image are cut off when the black

bar is not displayed.

4Press [OK].

[Note]

≥The screen mode is switched to “Normal” in the following

situations:

– when you change channel

– when you start or end the playback of a title

– when the unit is turned off or on.

≥[BD-V] [DVD-V] “Side cut” does not have any effect.

≥When “TV Aspect” (>92) is set to “Pan & Scan” or “Letterbox”, the

“Zoom” effect is disabled.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Status messages







REC1

3 KiKa REC2

ZDF









HDD

45:53 DR

18:53:50 11.11.2009

 T1 0:05.14 XP

Remain



 T2 0:10.10

 T3 0:00.10

0:35.32









18:53:50 11.11.2009

Live 18:53.50 Play 18:40.12



1 ZDF

All DVB Channels

12:55

Change category

For info press

Bruder Now MULTI

0:50 - 2:30

Switch the aspect ratio of the screen

16:9 image with

black bars on the

right and left

Display as frame

on the 4:3 aspect

ratio TV screen§

Enlarged display

with black bar

erased with Side

cut

Displayed with black

bars on right and left

on the 16:9 aspect

ratio TV screen

Enlarged display

with black bar

erased with Side

cut

4:3 image with

black bars at the

top and bottom

Displayed as frame

on the 16:9 aspect

ratio TV screen

Enlarged display

with black bar

erased with

Zoom

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 83 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Disc and card management

[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

[SD]

1While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2Press [3,4] to select “Blu-ray Disc /

DVD” or “SD Card” and press [OK].

3Press [3,4] to select “Blu-ray Disc

Management”, “DVD Management” or

“Card Management” and press [OK].

e.g., [RAM]

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM]

After performing steps 1–3 (>left)

1Press [3,4] to select “Disc

Protection” and press [OK].

2Press [2,1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

e.g., [RAM]

The lock symbol appears closed when the disc is write-

protected.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

You can provide a name for each disc.

Preparation

≥[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] Release protection (>above, Setting the

protection).

After performing steps 1–3 (>left)

1Press [3,4] to select “Disc Name”

and press [OK].

(>80, Entering text)

≥The disc name is displayed in the Blu-ray Disc Management/DVD

Management window.

≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalised disc, the name is

displayed on the Top Menu.

≥[+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other

equipment after creating top menu.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Common procedures

TV Guide

Play Video ( AVCHD )

Play Pictures ( JPEG )

Play Music

Copy

View

Others

Play all Video

FUNCTION MENU

Blu-ray Disc / DVD

SD Card

USB

RETURN

Play Video

Playlists

DVD-RAM

Play Pictures ( JPEG )

DVD Management

Select for playback of disc and formatting of disc etc.

Blu-ray

DVD Management

DVD-RAM

Titles 11

Used 0 : 22

Files 1

Time Remaining 5:38 EP

RETURN

Off

Disc Name

Delete all titles

Format Disc

Disc Protection

Setting the protection

Providing a name for a disc

DVD Management

DVD-RAM

RETURN

Disc Name

Delete all titles

Format Disc

Disc Protection

Titles 11

Used 0 : 22

Files 1

Time Remaining 5:38 EP

My favourite 01/02

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Titles 1

Used

Files 1

Time Remaining 5:38 EP

DVD Management

DVD-RAM

My favourite

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 84 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Convenient

functions

[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM]

Preparation

≥Release protection (>84, Setting the protection).

After performing steps 1–3 (>84, Common procedures)

1Press [3,4] to select “Delete all

titles” and press [OK].

2Press [2,1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

3Press [2,1] to select “Start” and

press [OK].

A message appears when finished.

4Press [OK].

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

[Note]

≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be

restored. Make certain before proceeding.

≥Still picture data (JPEG) or computer data cannot be deleted.

≥Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.

[SD]

You can delete the BD-Live video data (>46).

Preparation

After performing steps 1–3 (>84, Common procedures)

1Press [3,4] to select “Delete BD-

Video data” and press [OK].

2Press [2,1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

3Press [2,1] to select “Start” and

press [OK].

A message appears when finished.

4Press [OK].

[BD-RE] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

[BD-R] [+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)

[SD]

Preparation

≥[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [SD] Release protection (>11, 84, Setting the

protection).

[Note]

After performing steps 1–3 (>84, Common procedures)

1Press [3,4] to select, “Format Disc”

or “Format Card” and press [OK].

2Press [2,1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

3Press [2,1] to select “Start” and

press [OK].

A message appears when formatting is finished.

[Note]

≥Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may

take up to a maximum of 70 minutes ([RAM]).

≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.

This can render the disc or the card unusable.

4Press [OK].

[Note]

≥When a disc or card has been formatted using this unit, it may not

be possible to use it on any other equipment.

≥[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Formatting cannot be performed.

≥[-RW‹V›] [-RW‹VR›] You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video

format on this unit.

≥[HDD] Perform “Format HDD” in the Setup menu (>90).

To stop formatting [RAM]

Press [RETURN ].

≥You can cancel formatting if it takes more than 2 minutes. The disc

must be reformatted if you do this.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Deleting all titles—Delete all titles

Delete BD-Video data

Enabling the unit’s recording function—

Format

Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data), and

they cannot be restored. Check carefully before proceeding.

The contents are deleted when you format a disc or card even if

you have set protection.

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 85 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Disc and card management

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

The background selected here will be displayed as the DVD-Video

top menu after finalising or Create Top Menu ([+RW]).

After performing steps 1–3 (>84, Common procedures)

1Press [3,4] to select “Top Menu”

and press [OK].

2Press [3,4,2,1] to select the

background and press [OK].

≥You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu. (>49,

Change Thumbnail)

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

You can select whether to show the top menu after finalising or

creating Top Menu ([+RW]).

After performing steps 1–3 (>84, Common procedures)

1Press [3,4] to select “Auto-Play

Select” and press [OK].

2Press [3,4] to select “Top Menu” or

“Title 1” and press [OK].

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

You can play these discs on compatible DVD players by finalising it

on the unit, effectively making it into DVD-Video that complies with

DVD-Video standards. Before finalising, select the background on

the “Top Menu” (>above). The menu you create with the unit can

also be used on most DVD players.

[BD-R]

≥Finalising BD-R prevents accidental recording or editing.

≥BD-R that were recorded on this unit may not be played on other

Blu-ray Disc players, etc. whether or not you finalise it.

After performing steps 1–3 (>84, Common procedures)

1Press [3,4] to select “Finalise” and

press [OK].

2Press [2,1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

3Press [2,1] to select “Start” and

press [OK].

A message appears when finalising is finished.

[Note]

≥You cannot cancel finalising.

≥Finalising takes up to 15 minutes.

([-R]DL] [+R]DL] Finalising takes up to 60 minutes.)

≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising.

This will render the disc unusable.

4Press [OK].

[Note]

When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take

longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately

four times longer).

≥You cannot finalise discs recorded on other manufacturer’s

equipment.

≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] If you finalise discs recorded on

Panasonic equipment other than this unit, the background selected

as “Top Menu” may not be displayed.

≥Discs finalised on this unit may not be playable on other players

due to the condition of the recording.

[+RW]

+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient

function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a +RW

disc on other equipment.

You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.

Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (>left)

before creating top menu.

After performing steps 1–3 (>84, Common procedures)

1Press [3,4] to select “Create Top

Menu” and press [OK].

2Press [2,1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

3Press [2,1] to select “Start” and

press [OK].

Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating.

Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.

4Press [OK].

[Note]

≥You can record or edit discs after creating the Top Menu. But the

created menu is deleted when you record or edit disc. In such

cases, create the Top Menu again by using “Create Top Menu”.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Selecting the background style—Top

Selecting whether to show the Top Menu

first—Auto-Play Select

Top Menu: The top menu appears first.

Title 1: The disc content is played without displaying

the top menu.

Finalising—Finalise

7 8

Top Menu List

Display after finalising

Title Name

Thumbnail

(Still picture)

After finalising

≥[BD-R] [-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The disc becomes play-only and

you can no longer record or edit.

≥[-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting

(>85) although it becomes play-only after finalising.

Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 86 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Convenient

functions

Changing the unit’s settings

You can change the unit’s settings using Setup menu.

≥The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.

1While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2Press [3,4] to select “Others” and

press [OK].

3Press [3,4] to select “Setup” and

press [OK].

4Press [3,4] to select the menu and

press [OK].

5Press [3,4] to select the item and

press [OK].

6Press [3,4,2,1] to select the

option and press [OK].

≥Follow the instruction on the screen if the operation method

is different.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

∫Favourites Edit

You can create four Favourites of channels for viewing and

recording easier. Editing these Favourites does not affect the

channel setting itself.

≥Timer recording may not work correctly if you edit the Favourites

during timer recording standby.

Press the “Green” button to select the Favourite to edit.

To add channels to a Favourite

1Press [3,4] to select the channel in the “All DVB Channels”

column and press [OK].

≥Repeat this step to add other channels.

≥Press the “Red” button to select the Category.

≥Press the “Blue” button to change the sorting mode.

≥Press the “Yellow” button to add all the available channels to

the Favourite. (This function is available only when no channels

have been added to the Favourite.)

2Press [RETURN ].

3Press [OK] to save the Favourite.

To change the order of channels of a Favourite

1Press [1]§.

2Press [3,4] to select the channel in the “Favourite” column to

move and press the “Green” button.

3Press [3,4] to select the new position of the channel and press

the “Green” button.

≥Repeat the steps 2 – 3 to move other channels.

4Press [RETURN ].

5Press [OK] to save the Favourite.

To delete channels on a Favourite

1Press [1]§.

2Press [3,4] to select the channel in the “Favourite” column and

press [OK].

≥Repeat this step to delete other channels.

≥Press the “Yellow” button to delete all the channels from the

Favourite.

3Press [RETURN ].

4Press [OK] to save the Favourite.

Deleting a channel from a Favourite does not affect the channel

itself. You can still select the channel from the “All DVB

Channels”.

To change the name of a Favourite in the

“Favourite” column

1Press [1]§.

2Press the “Red” button.

≥User input screen appear.

3Press [3,4,2,1] to select a character and press [OK].

Repeat this step to enter other characters.

≥To delete a character

Press the “Red” button.

≥To delete all characters

Press the “Blue” button.

4Press [RETURN ] to save the Favourite.

§ When the station name of the “All DVB Channels” column is

highlighted

∫Channel List

You can edit the Channel List to change the channel skip setting or

channel number assignments to make tuning simpler.

To skip unwanted channels

1Press [3,4] to select the channel in the “All DVB Channels”.

≥Press the “Red” button to select the “Category”.

≥Press the “Blue” button to change the sorting mode.

2Press [OK].

≥The check mark is removed.

≥To clear the skip setting, press [OK] again.

≥To clear the all skip setting, press “Yellow” button.

To change the channel number assignment

1Press [3,4] to select the channel in the “All DVB Channels” and

press the “Green” button.

2Press [3,4] to select the channel number you wish to reassign.

3Press [OK].

≥If another channel is already assigned to the channel number

you wish to use, the two channels will be switched.

∫Auto Setup

You can restart auto channel setting if set up (>18) fails for some

reason.

Press [3,4] to select the Auto Setup method.

≥Search by selected satellite

Satellite is selected and transponders are searched for channels.

≥Search all satellites

All satellites and transponders are searched for channels.

When the confirmation screen appears

Press [2,1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

≥When restarting the auto tuning using the main unit’s buttons

(>114, To reset this unit)

Common procedures

DVB Tuning

Setup

RETURN

DVB Tuning

HDD / Disc

Picture

Sound

Display

Connection

Network Settings

Others

Favourites Editor Sorting 123...

Add all 123/ABC

Select favourites

Select category

RETURN

Add

Select channel

All DVB Channels Favourites 1

1 ZDF

2 3sat

3KiKa

5 ZDFdokukanal

7DKULTUR

8 DLF

6 ZDFtheaterkanal

4 ZDFinfokanal

All DVB Channels

ZDF

3sat

KiKa

ZDFdokukanal

DKULTUR

ZDFtheaterkanal

ZDFinfokanal

RETURN

Hide

Select

Move Reveal all 123/ABCCategory

Sorting 123...

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 87 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Changing the unit’s settings

∫Manual Tuning

You can add each new channels manually that the Auto Setup could

not complete successfully.

1Press [3,4] to select the channel you want to set.

Transponder Frequency

Enter value with numbered buttons.

Symbol Rate

Press [2,1] to select the auto and manual input of symbol

rate method.

≥Data flow transmission rate from the satellite to the dish.

Polarisation

Press [2,1] to select the Polarisation method.

≥Polarisation indicates whether the transponder transmits the

satellite signal horizontally or vertically.

Modulation

Press [2,1] to select the Modulation method.

Service ID

Press [2,1] to select the Service ID method.

2Press [OK] to start scan.

The set channel is displayed in the table.

3Press [EXIT] and press [WXCH] to check that applicable

channels have been selected.

∫Update Channel List

You can update the satellite digital channels to receive to the latest

one.

1Press [3,4] to select “Update Channel List” and press [OK].

2Press [3,4] to select the method and press [2,1] to select

settings.

≥Satellite

Satellite name is displayed.

≥Search Mode

All Channels:

Search for all channels.

Free Channels:

Search for free channels only.

≥Scan Mode

Quick:

In this mode, scanning takes place in a short period of time.

Full:

In this mode, the scanning is thorough but takes more time.

3Press [OK].

The unit starts searching for newly available satellite digital

channels.

4Press [RETURN ] to save the newly found channels.

∫Signal Condition

You can check the quality and strength of digital broadcast signals.

Check the satellite dish if you are receiving a poor signal.

When “Signal Condition” is displayed in grey and cannot be

selected:

1 Press [EXIT] to exit the screen.

2 Press [INPUT SELECT] to select “TV”.

3 Display the Setup menu again (>87, Common procedures).

The quality and strength of the signal are shown.

Press [WXCH] to select the channel.

Signal Input

Press [2,1] to select the terminal for which you wish to display the

signal condition.

Signal Quality

≥Below 2 (display red):

The signal quality is so poor that there may be interference in the

pictures and sound.

≥2–5 (display orange):

The signal quality is basically adequate, but brief interference in

the pictures and sound is possible in isolated case.

≥Over 5 (display green):

Optimum picture and sound quality.

Signal Strength

The display for signal strength is grey. “0” means signal strength is

0%, “10” means signal strength is 100%.

If the signal is too strong, the display will change from grey to red.

Reduce the signal amplification at your satellite dish.

≥When the signal is weak:

–adjust the position and direction of the dish.

–check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly

broadcasting.

Satellite

Satellite name is displayed.

Parameter

Physical channel and frequency is displayed.

∫Antenna System

You can receive several satellites if you have DiSEqC control

antenna system.

1Press [3,4] to select “Antenna System”.

2Press [2,1] to select antenna system and press [OK].

≥This unit supports DiSEqC Version 1.0.

∫LNB Configuration

LNB

≥If you set to “One LNB” in “Antenna System”.

≥If you set to “MiniDiSEqC” in “Antenna System”.

≥If you set to “DiSEqC1.0” in “Antenna System”.

LNB Low Band Frequency (MHz)

LNB High Band Frequency (MHz)

Satellite

Set the connected satellite for the selected LNB.

≥If you do not know the connected satellite, select “No Satellite”.

(Available satellite will be searched in Auto Setup.)

≥If you select “User defined”, set “Test Transponder Frequency”

manually.

Test Transponder Frequency

Satellite

No.

Free TV:0 Pay TV:0 Radio:0

Searching

QualityTypeChannel Name

Progress

0% 100%

RETURN

This will take about 10 minutes.

Update Channel List

Astra 19.2° E

“Finished” is displayed when the search is finished.

Channel Name 1 ZDF

Signal Input LNB in 1

Signal Condition

RETURN

Change Input

Channel Up

Channel Down

Signal Strength 010

Signal Quality 0 10

Parameter

11836MHz, H, 27497kS/s

Satellite

Astra 19.2° E

[One LNB] Compatible with Single LNB

[MiniDiSEqC] Up to 2 LNBs can be controlled.

[DiSEqC1.0] Up to 4 LNBs can be controlled.

Not selectable.

[AA] [AB]

[AA] [AB] [BA] [BB]

[No Satellite] [Turksat 42°E] [Hellas 39°E]

[Astra 28.2°E] [Arabsat 26°E] [Astra 23.5°E]

[Astra 19.2°E] [Eutelsat 16°E] [Hot Bird 13°E]

[Eutelsat 10°E] [Eurobird 9°E] [Eutelsat 7°E]

[Sirius 5°E] [Intelsat 1°W] [Amos 4°W]

[Atl. Bird 5°W] [Atl. Bird 7°W] [Atl. Bird 8°W]

[Hispasat 30°W] [User defined]

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 88 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Convenient

functions

∫Preferred Language

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

1Press [3,4] to select the item.

2Press [2,1] to select the language or item.

You can select up to 2 different subtitles, audio tracks and teletext to

be used when multi audio, subtitles and teletext digital broadcasts

are received. Select the order of priority.

If the selected language is not available, then the original language

will be selected.

Multi Audio

Multi Audio ( alternative )

Subtitles

Subtitles ( alternative )

Teletext Character Set

Teletext

Preferred Subtitle Type

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

§ [Other ¢¢¢¢]

Enter a code (>104) with the numbered buttons.

When the selected language is not available on the disc, the

default language is played. There are discs where you can only

switch the language from the menu screen (>21).

[BD-V] [DVD-V]

Choose the language for audio, subtitle and disc menus.

≥Some discs start in a certain language despite any changes you

make here.

[West] [East 1] [East 2]

[English] [German] [French] [Dutch]

[Spanish] [Portuguese] [Italian] [Turkish]

[Danish] [Swedish] [Finnish] [Norwegian]

[Polish] [Basque] [Catalan] [Corsican]

[Galician] [Czech] [Greek]

[Luxembourgish]

[Slovak] [Croatian] [Slovenian] [Estonian]

[Lithuanian] [Original]

≥The default language is the language setting selected when

making the initial settings.

[Standard]

[Hard of

Hearing] Display subtitles for people who are hard of

hearing.

HDD / Disc

Settings for Playback

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Soundtrack

(When selecting this item and press [OK], the title “Soundtrack for

BD-Video / DVD-Video” is displayed.)

[English] [German] [French] [Italian]

[Spanish] [Dutch] [Swedish]

[Original] The original language of each disc will be

selected.

[Other ¢¢¢¢]§

≥The default language is the language setting selected when

making the initial settings.

Subtitles

(When selecting this item and press [OK], the title “Subtitles for

BD-Video / DVD-Video” is displayed.)

[Automatic] If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is not

available, subtitles of that language will

automatically appear if available on that disc.

[English] [German] [French] [Italian]

[Spanish] [Dutch] [Swedish]

[Other ¢¢¢¢]§

(When selecting this item and press [OK], the title “Menu for BD-

Video / DVD-Video” is displayed.)

[English] [German] [French] [Italian]

[Spanish] [Dutch] [Swedish]

[Other ¢¢¢¢]§

≥The default language is the language setting selected when

making the initial settings.

Play Video ( AVCHD ) on BD-RE / BD-R

Set when you are playing a disc that has high definition video

(AVCHD) recorded by the Panasonic’s video camera, etc. and

high definition quality title that was recorded on this unit.

≥It can be played regardless of the setting for discs that do not

have both recorded.

[On] Playback high definition video (AVCHD)

[Off] Playback high definition quality title

BD-Live

You can restrict Internet access when BD-Live functions are used.

[On ( No Limit )] Internet access is permitted for all BD-Live

contents.

[On ( Limit )] Internet access is permitted only for BD-Live

contents which have content owner

certificates.

Internet access is prohibited for all BD-Live

contents without a certificate.

[Off] Internet access is prohibited for all BD-Live

contents.

BD-Video Ratings

Set a ratings level to limit BD-Video play.

Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit PIN with the

numbered buttons when the PIN screen is shown.

It will be the common PIN for “DVD-Video Ratings”, “BD-Video

Ratings” and “Lock” of “Internet Content Settings”.

Do not forget your PIN.

Setting ratings (When no limit is selected)

[No Limit] All BD-Video can be played.

[0 to 254 year(s)] Prohibits play of BD-Video with corresponding

ratings recorded on them.

≥Changing settings [When 0 to 254 year(s) is selected]

[Unlock Recorder] [Change Level]

[Temporary Unlock]

DVD-Video Ratings

(When selecting this item and press [OK], the title “Ratings” is

displayed.)

Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.

Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit PIN with the

numbered buttons when the PIN screen is shown. It will be the

common PIN for “DVD-Video Ratings”, “BD-Video Ratings” and

“Lock” of “Internet Content Settings”.

Do not forget your PIN.

Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)

[8 No Limit] All DVD-Video can be played.

[1 to 7] Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding

ratings recorded on them.

[0 Lock All] Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.

≥Changing settings (When level 0 to 7 is selected)

[Unlock Recorder] [Change Level]

[Temporary Unlock]

DivX Subtitle Text

Select a suitable item according to the language used for DivX

subtitles text (>45).

≥This item is displayed only when pressing [DISPLAY] after

playing back a file.

[Latin 1] English, German, Spanish, etc.

[Latin 2] Polish, Czech, Hungarian, etc.

[Cyrillic] Russian, etc.

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 89 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Changing the unit’s settings

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

Settings for Recording

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Recording time in EP mode

Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode

(>30, Recording modes and approximate recording times).

[6 hours] You can record for 6 hours on an unused

4.7 GB disc.

[8 hours] You can record for 8 hours on an unused

4.7 GB disc.

≥The sound quality is better when using “6 hours” than when

using “8 hours”.

Aspect for Recording

Sets the aspect ratio when recording or copying in HG, HX, HE,

HL, XP, SP, LP, EP, FR mode.

[Automatic] The title will be recorded with the original aspect

ratio at the time when recording started (including

when recording started at a commercial, etc.).

[16:9]

[4:3]

≥In the following cases, the programme will be recorded with the

original aspect ratio.

–[BD-RE] [BD-R] When the recording mode is set to “XP”, “SP”,

“LP”, “EP” or “FR”

–[HDD] [RAM] When the recording mode is set to “XP”, “SP”,

“LP”, “EP” or “FR” with the “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to

“Off”

≥In the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”,

recordings will be made or copied in 4:3.

–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] When the recording mode is set to “EP” or

“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

–When recording to a +R, +R DL and +RW.

Chapter Creation

Set the automatic Chapter Creation method. (>51)

[Automatic] [5 minutes]

[Off] No chapter start points are set.

Rec for High Speed Copy

You can copy titles recorded in XP, SP, LP, EP or FR mode from

the HDD to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),

+R, +R DL and +RW using high speed mode. However, screen

size, etc. is restricted (>below).

We recommend turning the setting “Off” if high speed copy to

DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme.

This setting is valid for the following cases:

–Recording from an external equipment (including DV

equipment)

–Copying from a finalised DVD-Video disc.

[On] You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press

[2,1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

≥The following restrictions are applied to recorded

titles.

–Recordings are made using the aspect ratio set

in “Aspect for Recording” (>above).

–Select the type of audio in advance from

“Bilingual Audio Selection” (>91).

–You are no longer able to switch the audio when

watching a programme on an input channel on

the TV connected to this unit.

[Off]

[Note]

Titles recorded in XP, SP, LP, EP, FR mode on HDD cannot be

copied to BD-RE or BD-R using high speed mode, regardless of

the above setting.

BD / DVD Speed for High Speed Copy

(When selecting this item and press [OK], the title “Blu-ray Disc /

DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” is displayed.)

Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-speed

copy compatible discs).

[Maximum]

[Normal

( Silent )] The noise generated by this unit is less than when

“Maximum” is selected, however the time required

for copying will double (approximately).

Start Recording Time

This function sets the timer recording to start earlier than the TV

Guide time.

[1 min earlier] [3 min earlier] [5 min earlier]

[10 min earlier] [Off]

Finish Recording Time

This function sets the timer recording to stop later than the TV

Guide time.

[1 min later] [3 min later] [5 min later]

[10 min later] [Off]

HDD Management

≥Press and hold [OK] for 3 seconds to show the following settings.

Delete all titles

Delete all titles.

≥Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.

Format HDD

Format of the HDD is performed.

Formatting deletes all contents, and they cannot be restored.

Check carefully before proceeding.

Picture

Still Mode

Select the type of picture shown when you pause play (>118,

Frames and fields).

[Automatic]

[Field] Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is

selected. (The picture is coarser.)

[Frame] Select if small text or fine patterns cannot be seen

clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The picture

is clearer and finer.)

Seamless Play

Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and

partially deleted titles.

≥It is not valid for titles in DR mode or AVCHD videos.

[On] The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly. This does

not work when there are several audio types included on

the playlist and when using Quick View (PLAYa1.3).

Additionally, the positioning of chapter segments may

change slightly.

[Off] The points where chapters in playlists change are played

accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.

NTSC Video Output

Select how the NTSC image is output.

[NTSC] Output as NTSC.

[PAL60] Convert and output as PAL60.

Select this when connected to the PAL format TV.

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 90 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Convenient

functions

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

§1The default setting is “PCM”.

§2The default setting is “Bitstream”.

Sound

Dynamic Range Compression

[BD-V] [DVD-V]

Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.

[On] [Off] [Automatic]

Downmix

Switch the downmix system for playing back multi-channel

surround sound.

≥When “Dolby D/Dolby D +/Dolby TrueHD”, “DTS/DTS-HD” or

“MPEG” is set to “Bitstream”, there are no downmix effects for the

audio output.

≥The audio output will be in “Stereo” in the following cases.

–AVCHD playback

–[BD-V]: Playback of clicking sound on the menu and audio with

secondary video in picture-in-picture mode

[Stereo] When connected to equipment that does not

support the virtual surround function.

[Surround

encoded] When connected to equipment that supports the

virtual surround function

Bilingual Audio Selection

(Only when recording from DV input)

Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type when:

≥Copying to a DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and

+RW.

≥“Rec for High Speed Copy” is enabled. (>90)

≥Recording sound in LPCM (>92, “Audio Mode for XP

Recording”).

[M 1][M2]

≥You cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an

external source, such as when copying from a video cassette

recorder (except from DV equipment connected to this unit’s DV

input terminal). Select the audio on the other equipment.

≥When recording from the unit’s DV terminal, select the type of

audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” (>92).

Digital Audio Output

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

PCM Down Conversion

Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz.

It will be converted to 48 kHz regardless of the setting in following

cases.

≥The signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz.

≥The disc has copy protection.

≥“BD-Video Secondary Audio” is set to “On”. ([BD-V])

[On] Signals are converted to 48 kHz. (Choose when the

connected equipment cannot process signals with a

sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)

[Off] Signals are output as 96 kHz. (Choose when the

connected equipment can process signals with a sampling

frequency of 96 kHz.)

Dolby D/Dolby D +/Dolby TrueHD§1

DTS/DTS-HD§2

MPEG§1

Select to output Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD,

DTS Digital Surround, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS-HD

Master Audio or MPEG as bitstream or PCM.

[Note]

≥Not making the proper settings may result in noise.

≥If the unit is connected with the HDMI AV OUT terminal, the

specifications of the connected equipment take preference over

this unit and audio selected in these items may not be output

(e.g., when a television is connected, the HDMI audio output of

this unit is limited to down-mixed 2ch.)

[Bitstream] Select “Bitstream” when the connected equipment

can decode the respective audio format.

– Connect equipment supporting HDMI Ver.

1.3a (High Bit Rate Audio) and use a High

Speed HDMI Cable in order to output High Bit

Rate Audio such as Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby

TrueHD, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio or

DTS-HD Master Audio.

[PCM] Select “PCM” when the connected equipment

cannot decode the respective audio format.

Refer to the operating instructions for connected

devices to verify whether or not they can decode

each of the audio formats.

Set the speaker output on the amplifier when

output with PCM.

BD-Video Secondary Audio

([BD-V] with secondary audio)

Turn on/off the clicking sound on the menu and audio with

secondary video.

[On] The sampling frequency is converted to 48 kHz.

Audio will be converted to Dolby Digital or DTS

during playback of the BD-Video with secondary

audio when “Bitstream” (>above) is selected.

[Off] Output in original audio method.

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 91 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Changing the unit’s settings

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be

shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you may

not be able to change the settings.

Audio Mode for XP Recording

Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP mode.

[Dolby Digital] (>118) [LPCM] (>119)

≥The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than that of

normal XP mode recordings.

≥The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you selected

LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.

≥When recording a bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in

advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (>91).

Audio Mode for DV Input

You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s DV

input terminal (>60).

[Stereo 1] Records audio (L1, R1).

[Stereo 2] Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)

subsequent to original recording.

[Mix] Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.

≥When recording bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in

advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (>91).

Audio Channels for HG / HX / HE / HL Recording

This will set the audio when copying DR mode titles to BD-RE or

BD-R disc in “HG”, “HX”, “HE”, or “HL” mode, or converting the

recording mode to “HG”, “HX”, “HE”, or “HL” mode (>50).

[5.1-channel]§Record using 5.1 ch audio

[2-channel] Record using 2 ch audio.

§ If the audio sampling frequency is not 48 kHz, surround audio is

mixed and recorded in front LR channels. Audio will be output

from two front speakers only, even if you play it on 5.1 ch

speaker connection.

Display

Language

Choose the language for these menus and on-screen messages.

[Deutsch] [English] [Français] [Italiano]

≥The default language is the language setting selected when

making the initial settings.

On-Screen Messages

Choose the approximate time until the digital channel information

screen (>27) disappears automatically.

The length of time the Control Panel (>77) is displayed can also

be changed, but “Off” does not work.

[Off] (The digital channel information is not displayed.)

[3 sec.] [5 sec.] [7 sec.] [10 sec.]

Unit’s Display

Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.

This setting is fixed with “Automatic” if you set “Power Save” (>95)

to “On”.

[Bright][Dim]

[Automatic] The display turns dark during play and disappears

when the unit is turned off. It reappears momentarily

if a button is pressed. While using this mode, the

standby power consumption can be reduced.

Screen Saver

This is to prevent burn-in on the screen.

≥When this is set to “On”, the masked-off area on the screen

becomes grey.

[Only when connecting with an HDMI cable or a component video

cable and “HDMI Video Format” (>93) is set to any other mode

than “576p/480p”, or “Component Resolution” (>94) is set to

“720p” or “1080i”]

[On] If there is no operation for a while or more, the

displayed screen switches to the other states

automatically.

– When the DIRECT NAVIGATOR, TV Guide,

Timer recording list, Copying list or

FUNCTION MENU, etc. is displayed, the screen

saver is not displayed.

– When Music is played, the display returns to the

screen saver mode. (Playback continues.)

– When still pictures are shown (except for

slideshows), the display returns to the Picture

View screen.

– The display returns to the screen saver mode

when it is paused by the Pause Live TV. (Pause

status will continue.)

[Off]

Teletext

Select the Teletext display mode. (>28)

[TOP (FLOF)] When switching Teletext display mode to

either TOP mode or FLOF (FASTEXT)

mode.

[List] When switching Teletext display mode to

List mode.

Blue LED

Set the lighting method for the lamp on the SD card slot.

[On]

[SD inserted] When this unit is turned on and SD card is inserted,

the lamp is lighted.

[Off]

Connection

TV Aspect

Set to match the type of television connected.

[16:9] When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television.

[Pan & Scan] When connected to a 4:3 aspect

television, side picture is trimmed for

16:9 picture.

This setting may not work and the

pictures may be shown in the

letterbox style depending on the

content.

[Letterbox] When connected to a 4:3 aspect

television. 16:9 picture is shown in

the letterbox style.

Aspect for 4:3 Video

To play a 4:3 title, set how to show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen

television.

[4:3] Picture output expands left or right.

[16:9] Picture is output as original aspect with side

panels.

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 92 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Convenient

functions

∫Types of disc or title recorded on HDD, BD-RE or

BD-R for the type of connected TV

When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a

title recorded on HDD, BD-RE or BD-R using PAL or NTSC, refer to

this table.

(≤: Possible to view, –: Impossible to view)

§1Select “PAL60” for “NTSC Video Output” in the Setup menu

(>90). If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60

signals the picture will not be shown correctly.

§2Select “NTSC” in “TV System”.

≥When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, BD-RE or BD-R,

ensure that you match the “TV System” setting to the title (PAL or

NTSC).

TV System

Change the setting to match the equipment you are connecting

with, or to match the title when there are both PAL and NTSC titles

on the HDD, BD-RE or BD-R.

[PAL]≥Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system

television.

≥Select to record television programmes and PAL input

from other equipment.

≥Select when playing a PAL input title recorded on the

HDD, BD-RE or BD-R.

[NTSC] ≥Select when connecting to a NTSC television.

Television programmes cannot be recorded properly.

≥Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.

≥Select when playing a NTSC input title recorded on the

HDD, BD-RE or BD-R.

[Note]

≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have

PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can

be recorded onto the HDD, BD-RE or BD-R.)

≥

If “NTSC” has been selected, the TV Guide system cannot be used

≥A disc or title with different “TV System” may not be able to

playback while recording or on standby for the timer recording.

You will be able to playback by changing the “TV System” settings

in that case, but to prevent failure of the timer recording, change

back the settings before the recording starts.

To change the setting all at once (PAL!#NTSC)

While stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [<OPEN/CLOSE] on the

main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.

TV type Disc/Titles recorded on HDD,

BD-RE or BD-R Yes/No

Multi-system

TV PAL ≤

NTSC ≤

PAL TV PAL ≤

NTSC ≤§1 (PAL60)

NTSC TV PAL –

NTSC ≤§2

HDMI Connection

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

HDMI Video Mode

Select “On” when video is output from HDMI AV OUT terminal.

[On]

[Off] When the equipment such as amplifiers is connected

using HDMI cable, and TV is connected to the

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal (setup before

connecting to the amplifiers.)

HDMI Video Format

You can only select items compatible with the connected

equipment. This setting normally does not need to be changed.

However if you are concerned about output picture quality, it may

be improved by changing the setting.

≥To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need to

connect the unit directly to 1080p compatible HDTV. If this unit is

connected to an HDTV through other equipment, it must also be

1080p compatible.

[576p/480p]

[720p] All images other than 720p will be output as 1080i.

[1080i]

[1080p] When outputting 1080p signal, we recommend

using High Speed HDMI Cables that have the

HDMI logo (as shown on the cover) and are less

than 5.0 meters to prevent video distortion etc.

[Automatic] Automatically selects the output resolution best

suited to the connected television (1080p, 1080i,

720p or 576p/480p).

≥Press and hold [∫] and [1] (PLAY) for more than 5 seconds

when the image is disturbed by changing the setting. It will be

set to “576p/480p”.

BD-Video 24p Output

When playing BD-Video recorded in 24 frames, this unit displays

each frame at 1/24 second intervals–the same interval originally

shot with the film movie.

≥This item is effective only when the unit is connected to a TV

with an HDMI terminal that supports 1080/24p input.

[On] ≥Images in 24p are output in 24p as they are.

(Only when the “HDMI Video Format” is “Automatic” or

“1080p”)

However,

– when video is being output at 24 frames, images from

any other terminal than the HDMI terminal may not be

output properly.

– when images other than 24p are played, images are

output at 60p.

[Off]

HDMI Audio Output

[On]

[Off] When connected to TV with HDMI cable, and connected

to amplifiers not compatible to HDMI with a DIGITAL

AUDIO OUT terminal

7.1ch Audio Reformatting [BD-V]

[Automatic] Surround audio of less than 7.1 ch will be output as

7.1 ch automatically.

“Automatic” is enabled in the following cases:

– When the connected device supports 7.1 channel

surround audio

– “Dolby D/Dolby D +/Dolby TrueHD” in the Setup

menu (>91) is set to “PCM”

– When the audio is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital

Plus, Dolby TrueHD or LPCM

[Off] It is output via the original channels. However,

surround audio of DTS and DTS-HD will be output

as 7.1 ch automatically.

VIERA Link

Set to use “HDAVI Control” function when connected with an

HDMI cable to a device that supports “HDAVI Control”.

[On]

[Off] Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI Control”.

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 93 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Changing the unit’s settings

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

Component Resolution

This sets the video output resolution when using the component

video terminal.

[576i/480i] [576p/480p] [720p] [1080i]

≥You cannot change the setting while the “HDMI Video Mode” is

set to “On”. Set the “HDMI Video Mode” to “Off” and set the “AV1

Output” to “Video ( with component )” or “S Video ( with

component )”.

≥If it is set to “720p”, images other than “720p” will be output as

“1080i”.

≥The video output resolution will be restricted to “576p/480p” even

if you select “720p” or “1080i” when viewing or recording the

following images:

–Some programmes in the HD format

–DVD-Video discs

–DivX

–BD-Video discs recorded at a rate of 50 field per second

–Images input via AV1, AV2 or DV input

≥Press the [∫] and [1] (PLAY) for more than 5 seconds when the

image is disturbed by changing the setting. It will be set to “576i/

480i”.

AV1 Output

Set according to the terminal of the connected TV.

Select “Video ( with component )” or “S Video ( with component )”

for component output (progressive output).

If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select

“RGB 1 ( without component )” or “RGB 2 ( without component )”.

When a decoder is connected, do not set to “RGB 1 ( without

component )”.

[Video ( with component )]

Select when a TV is connected that can receive a composite signal.

[S Video ( with component )]

Select when a TV is connected that can receive an S Video

signal.

[RGB 1 ( without component )]

Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal. If

you always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB

signal, select this mode. The TV screen will automatically switch

to display the picture from the unit when the unit is turned on.

[RGB 2 ( without component )]

Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal. If

you would like to switch to display the picture from the unit only

when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.

AV2 Settings

Set to match the connected equipment.

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

AV2 Input

Set to “RGB / Video” or “RGB” when receiving or recording RGB

output from external equipment.

[RGB / Video] [RGB] [Video] [S Video]

Ext Link

This setting cannot be made when the “TV System” is set to

“NTSC” (>93).

[Ext Link 1] When a Set Top Box etc. which transmits a special

control signal recordings via the 21-pin Scart cable

is connected.

Start and stop timings of recording are controlled

by the control signal.

[Ext Link 2] When external equipment with a timer function is

connected.

When it turns on, recording starts.

When it turns off, recording stops.

Common Interface

Access to software contained on Common Interface (CI) modules.

(>16, 19) Follow the on-screen instructions.

Network Settings

IP Address / DNS Settings (>96)

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Connection Test

IP Address Auto-assignment

[On][Off]

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway Address

DNS-IP Auto-assignment

[On][Off]

Primary DNS

Secondary DNS

Connection Speed Auto-configure

[On][Off]

Connection Speed Setting

This is enabled only when “Connection Speed Auto-configure” is

turned “Off”.

[10BASE half duplex] [10BASE full duplex]

[100BASE half duplex] [100BASE full duplex]

Proxy Server Settings (>97)

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Initialize

Set the setting of the “Proxy Server Settings” back.

Proxy Address

(The initial setting is blank.)

Proxy Port Number

(The initial setting is “0”.)

Connection Test

Internet Content Settings (>97)

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Lock

You can restrict using VIERA CAST.

Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit PIN with the

numbered buttons when the PIN setting screen is shown. It will be

the common PIN for “DVD-Video Ratings”, “BD-Video Ratings”,

and “Lock”.

Do not forget your PIN.

[On] [Off]

Automatic Volume Control

[On]

[Off] Select “Off” when the audio is warped while

using VIERA CAST.

Home Network ( DLNA ) Settings (>97)

You will be able to access this unit from Panasonic DLNA

compatible equipment on the network by registering them to this

unit.

It is also possible to change the name of this unit on the network.

Server ( DLNA ) Settings (>97)

By allowing access from non-Panasonic DLNA compatible

equipment on the network, it allows them to access this unit.

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 94 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Convenient

functions

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

Others

Automatic Standby

Select how long the unit remains on when it is not being used.

[2 hours] [4 hours] [6 hours] [Off]

Remote Control

Change the remote control code on the main unit and the remote

control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic products

close together.

[BD 1][BD2][BD3]

Use “BD 1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.

1Press [3,4] to select the code (“BD 1”, “BD 2” or “BD 3”)

and press [OK].

To change the code on the remote control

2While pressing [OK], press and hold the numbered button

([1], [2] or [3]) for more than 5 seconds.

3Press [OK].

∫When the following indicator appears on the

unit’s display

The unit’s remote control code

Change the code on the remote control to match the main unit’s

(>step 2).

[Note]

Executing “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu returns the main

unit code to “BD 1”. Change the remote control code to 1

(>step 2).

Clock

This unit usually obtains time and date information from digital

broadcasts and automatically corrects the time several times a day.

However, if the time is not set correctly, use the settings listed in the

method below.

1Press [3,4] to select “Off” of “Automatic” and press [OK].

When you select “Off”

2Press [2,1] to select the item you want to change.

The items change as follows:

Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year

^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J

3Press [3,4] to change the setting.

4Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.

The clock starts.

∫To change the Time Zone

When the time is not correct, set “Time Zone” (GMT -6 to + 6).

1Press [3,4] to select “On” of “Automatic” and press [OK] in

step 1.

Auto clock setting starts. This takes a few minutes.

“Automatic clock setting completed.” screen is displayed.

2Press [1].

3Press [3,4] to select the correct time zone and press [OK].

4 Press [RETURN ].

Clock

Time

Automatic Time Zone

Date

Automatic

Please set the clock.

OK: access RETURN: leave

RETURN

27 5

2009

Off

Time Zone >below

PIN Entry

This PIN will be used for following controlling

–BD-Video playback

–DVD-Video playback

–Using VIERA CAST

≥Make a note of PIN in case you forget it.

1Press [3,4] to select the number, then press [1].

≥You can also use the numbered buttons.

2Repeat step 1 for enter 4-digit PIN.

3Press [OK] to confirm.

Power Save

[On] Power consumption is minimized when the unit is turned to

standby (>115).

[Off] It is possible to start quickly from standby mode.

≥“Unit’s Display” (>92) is fixed with “Automatic” when “Power

Save” is set to “On”, and is changed to “Bright” when “Power

Save” is set to “Off”.

≥This function cannot be enabled when the DLNA function is

enabled in "Home Network ( DLNA ) Settings" or "Server ( DLNA )

Settings". (>94)

System Update (>98)

In order to update this unit’s software (firmware) and to support

system changes made by broadcasts, this unit periodically

performs software (firmware) updates.

Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Software Update in Standby

[0:00 to 23:00]§When you set this unit to standby mode,

software (firmware) updates and TV Guide

data are downloaded automatically at the

specified time.

[Off]

§ Default setting is “3:00”.

Software Licence

Information about the software licence is displayed.

DivX Registration

You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX Video-

on-Demand (VOD) content (>45).

Initialize

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Shipping Condition

All the settings except for the ratings level and ratings PIN return

to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also

cancelled.

[Yes] [No]

Default Settings

All the settings other than the tuning settings, clock settings,

language settings, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings

PIN, remote control code, network settings etc. return to the

factory presets.

[Yes] [No]

Remember the PIN.

PIN Entry

0000

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 95 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Changing the unit’s settings

These settings are used if you will connect this unit to a network.

The connection to the Internet may take time or the internet may not

be connected depending on the connection environment.

It is recommended that you use a broadband connection.

∫Testing the connection

Always test the connection when a LAN cable is connected or when

new “IP Address / DNS Settings” have been made.

1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3,4] to select “Others” and press [OK].

3 Press [3,4] to select “Setup” and press [OK].

4 Press [3,4] to select “Network Settings” and

press [OK].

5 Press [3,4] to select “IP Address / DNS

Settings” and press [OK].

6 Press [3,4] to select “Connection Test” and

press [OK].

“Testing”: The test is in progress.

“OK”: The connection is completed.

“Failed”: Please check the connection and settings.

[Note]

≥Perform the “Connection Test” also when any change was made to

the “IP Address / DNS Settings”.

≥If the connection test fails, it may be necessary to set the MAC

address of this unit at the router side. The MAC address can be

displayed by selecting “Network Settings” and “IP Address / DNS

Settings” in steps 1–5 (>above).

∫Setting the IP address

In most cases, default settings can normally be used without making

any changes.

Set the IP address only when the router has no DHCP server

functions or when the router’s DHCP server function is disabled.

After performing steps 1–5 (>left)

6Press [3,4] to select “IP Address Auto-

assignment” and press [2,1] to select “Off”.

7Press [3,4] to select “IP Address”, “Subnet

Mask” or “Gateway Address” and press [OK].

8 Enter numbers with the numbered buttons and

press [OK].

≥After checking the specifications for your broadband router,

enter each number.

If the number is unknown, then check the number of other

devices such as personal computers connected via a LAN

cable. Assign a different number from those of other devices for

the “IP Address” and the same number for others.

≥If a wrong number is entered, then press [DEL].

9Press [2,1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

[Note]

≥The numeric input range is between 0 and 255.

∫Setting the DNS-IP

In most cases, default settings can normally be used without making

any changes.

When setting an assigned DNS server from your internet service

provider, perform the following settings.

After performing steps 1–5 (>left)

6Press [3,4] to select “DNS-IP Auto-

assignment” and press [2,1] to select “Off”.

7Press [3,4] to select “Primary DNS” or

“Secondary DNS”and press [OK].

8 Enter numbers with the numbered buttons and

press [OK].

≥Follow the instructions given by your internet service provider

and enter the numbers.

If the number is unknown, then check the number of other

devices such as personal computers connected via a LAN

cable and assign the same number.

≥If a wrong number is entered, then press [DEL].

9Press [2,1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

[Note]

≥The numeric input range is between 0 and 255.

∫Setting the connection speed

When the connection test results in “Failed” after the IP and DNS-IP

addresses are assigned, perform the following settings.

After performing steps 1–5 (>left)

6Press [3,4] to select “Connection Speed Auto-

configure” and press [2,1] to select “Off”.

7Press [3,4] to select “Connection Speed

Setting” and press [2,1] to select a

connection speed.

≥Select a connection speed in accordance with the environment

of the network connected.

≥When the settings are changed, the network connection may be

disabled depending on the device.

Network Settings

Preparation

Connect to the network. (>103)

RETURN

IP Address / DNS Settings

Connection Test

䋭䋭䋭䋭

OnOn

㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄

䋭䋭䋭䋭

IP Address Auto-assignment

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway Address

DNS-IP Auto-assignment

Primary DNS

Secondary DNS

Connection Speed Auto-configure

Connection Speed Setting

MAC Address: 00-0b-97-e6-7a-ae

192

...

IP Address

Please input IP address and press “OK”.

The IP address will be cleared by pressing

“OK” when there is no number input.

Press “DEL” button if a wrong number is

entered.

0-Number9

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 96 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Convenient

functions

∫Setting the proxy server

In most cases, default settings can normally be used without making

any changes.

Please use this setting when instructed to by your Internet service

provider.

≥Set the proxy server only after the connection test is completed

properly.

After performing steps 1–4 (>96, Testing the connection)

5 Press [3,4] to select “Proxy Server Settings”

and press [OK].

6 Press [3,4] to select “Connection Test” and

press [OK].

7 Press [3,4] to select “Proxy Address” and

press [OK].

(>80, Entering text)

After the input of “Proxy Address” is completed

8 Press [3,4] to select “Proxy Port Number” and

press [OK].

9 Enter numbers with the numbered buttons and

press [OK].

Press [2,1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

To set back to default setting

After performing step 5 (>above)

1Press [3,4] to select “Initialize” and press [OK].

2Press [2,1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

∫Setting the internet content (VIERA CAST)

After performing steps 1–4 (>96, Testing the connection)

5 Press [3,4] to select “Internet Content

Settings” and press [OK].

≥Lock (>94)

≥Automatic Volume Control

Select “On”, the volume is controlled by this unit automatically. If

you want to enjoy the original volume, set it to “Off”.

∫Register the DLNA compatible equipment to this

unit

After performing steps 1–4 (>96, Testing the connection)

“Testing”: The test is in progress.

“OK”: The connection is completed.

Press [RETURN ] to exit.

“Failed”: Please check the connection and settings.

RETURN

Proxy Server Settings

Initialize

Proxy Address

Proxy Port Number

Connection Test ----

Proxy Port Number

Please input HTTP Proxy Server Port Number

and press “OK”. The number will be set to “0”

by pressing “OK” when there is no number

input.

Press “DEL” button if a wrong number

is entered.

0-Number9

RETURN

Internet Content Settings

Automatic Volume Control

Off

Lock

≥When connecting Panasonic DLNA compatible equipment

5 Select “Home Network ( DLNA ) Settings” and

press [OK].

6 Select “On” and press [OK].

7 Select “Yes” and press [OK].

Access this unit from the connected DLNA compatible

equipment within 10 minutes.

≥Up to 4 devices can be registered.

≥Even if it is Panasonic DLNA compatible equipment, you may not

be able to register from "Home Network ( DLNA ) Settings".

In such a case, register the equipment from "Server ( DLNA )

Settings" (>below)

≥

When connecting non-Panasonic DLNA compatible equipment

5 Select “Server ( DLNA ) Settings” and press

[OK].

≥Up to 4 devices can be registered.

6 Select the MAC Address for the connected

equipment and press [OK].

≥Up to 12 devices can display the MAC Address.

7 Select “Yes” and press [OK].

∫Viewing video in this unit via the registered

equipment (>79, DLNA feature)

RETURN

Home Network ( DLNA ) Settings

Registered devices list

Set unit name

Off

Home Network ( DLNA )

RETURN

Server ( DLNA ) Settings

MAC Address

Off

Server ( DLNA ) function

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 97 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Software (firmware) Update

Software (firmware) of this unit can be updated automatically by

following method.

≥From broadcasts

≥From Internet [network connection and setting is required. (>96,

103)]

Update of the software (firmware) is done when it is in standby

mode.

Once the new software (firmware) is found, it will start the download

of the software (firmware), and then the upload.

Download of the software (firmware) will start automatically when the

power of this unit is turned off or when the set time comes (>95)

≥The time it takes to update depends on the connection.

–For Broadcast: About 2 to 4 hours

–For Internet: About 1 hour

(It may take longer than specified above to download because

the download time differs depending on the network

environment. It is recommended to be used in a broadband

environment.)

Time to start the download of the software (firmware) can be set

arbitrarily. If you do not want to perform the software (firmware)

update during the standby mode, set the "Software Update in

Standby" in the Setup menu to "Off". (>95)

∫The unit’s display during the update

e.g.,

≥“SW-DL” : Software (firmware) is downloading.

Download will stop when the power is turned on, or the timer

recording starts.

≥“START” : Update of the software (firmware) will start once the

download is completed.

≥“UPD /” : Software (firmware) is updating.

≥“FINISH” : Updated of the software (firmware) has completed.

[Note]

≥If the timer recording is scheduled within the following time at the

start of the download, the download will not be executed.

–For broadcast: Within 4 hours

–For Internet: Within 1 hour

≥If downloading on this unit fails or this unit is not connected to the

Internet, then you can download the latest software (firmware) from

the following website and burn it to a CD-R to update the software

(firmware).

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/

≥Software (firmware) of CAM (compatible CI Plus) can be updated

automatically from broadcasts.

≥Availability of software (firmware) update is detected while viewing

the programmes compatible with CI Plus.

Notification is displayed on the screen if available.

≥Notice is not displayed in the following cases:

– When recording a programme

– When scheduled recording and update occur simultaneously

– When displaying FUNCTION MENU, DIRECT NAVIGATOR, etc.

Follow the on-screen instructions when updating.

∫The unit’s display during the update

e.g.,

≥If you did not update or if the notice for update did not display on

the screen, you will be notified on the Digital Channel Information

of the channel where the update for CAM was detected.

To perform an update, press the "Red” button and follow the on-

screen instructions.

[Note]

≥Operations such as view, playback, or record cannot be performed

while updating the CAM.

If you press the [Í] on the remote control while updating the CAM,

the power of this unit will turn off automatically after the update.

≥For details, refer to your CAM’s operating instructions or consult

your dealer.

You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete.

Removing the AC mains lead while the update is in progress

may damage the unit. Don’t remove the AC mains lead during

the update.

Update software (firmware) of this unit

CI Plus compatible CAM (Conditional

Access Module) software (firmware)

update

1 ZDF

All DVB Channels

12:55

Change category

CAM Upgrade Info

Bruder

0:50 - 2:30

Now

Dolby DEncrypted MULTI

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 98 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

RQT9434

Convenient

functions

Other Settings

You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn

the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the

television channel and change the television volume.

1Point the remote control at the

television

While pressing [ÍTV], enter the code

with the numbered buttons.

Manufacturer and Code No.

2Test by turning on the television and

changing channels.

≥Repeat the procedure until you find the code that allows

correct operation.

≥If your television brand is not listed or if the code listed for

your television does not allow control of your television, this

remote control is not compatible with your television.

[Note]

≥If your television brand has more than one code listed, select the

one that allows correct operation.

The HOLD function deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote

control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.

Press and hold [OK] and

[RETURN ]

simultaneously until “X

HOLD” appears on the unit’s display.

If you press a button while the HOLD function is on, “X HOLD”

appears on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.

To cancel the HOLD function

Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] simultaneously until “X

HOLD” disappears.

Television operation

e.g., 01: [0] > [1] 10: [1] > [0]

PAGE



DRIVE

SELECT



VOL

abc

jkl

ghi

def

mno

Turn TV on/off

Input select Volume

Channel

Select

AIWA 35 MITSUBISHI 05/19/20/47

BEJING 33 NEC 36

BENQ 58/59 NOKIA 25/26/27/60/61

BRANDT 10/15 OLEVIA 45

CENTREX 66 ORION 05

CURTIS 05 PHILCO 41/48/64

DESMET 05 PHONOLA 05

ELEMIS 05 PROVIEW 52

FINLUX 61 RADIOLA 05

FUJITSU 53 SALORA 26

GOLDSTAR 05/50/51 SANSUI 05

GRADIENTE 36 SCHNEIDER 05/29/30

HIKONA 52 SELECO 05/25

INNO HIT 05 SIEMENS 09

ITT 25 SONY 08

JVC 17/30/39/70 TELEFUNKEN 10/11/12/13/14

KOLIN 45 TEX ONDA 52

LG 05/50/51 TOSHIBA 16/57

MAG 52 YAMAHA 18/41

Brand Code Brand Code

05LOEWE

WHITE

WESTINGHOUSE

07/46

Panasonic 01/02/03/04 METZ 05/28

AKAI 27/30 MIVAR 24

BEKO 05/71/72/73/74 NOBLEX 33

BP 09 NORDMENDE 10

BUSH 05 ONWA 30/39/70

CHANGHONG 69 PEONY 49/69

DAEWOO 64/65 PHILIPS 05/06/46

DUAL 05 PIONEER 37/38

FERGUSON 10/34 PYE 05

FUNAI 32/42/43/65/6863/67 SAMSUNG

FISHER 21 SABA 10

GOODMANS 05 SANYO 21/54/55/56

GRUNDIG

05/69/75/76/77/78

09 SEG

IRRADIO 30 SINUDYNE 05

JINGXING 31/33/66/67/6949 TCL

KDS 52 TEVION 52

KONKA 62 THOMSON 10/15/44

HITACHI 05/22/23/40/41 SHARP 18

HOLD function

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 99 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

100

RQT9434

Additional connections

≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.

COMPONENT VIDEO terminals can be used for either interlace or

progressive output (>119) and provide a purer picture than the

VIDEO OUT terminal.

If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube)

Progressive output may cause some flickering, even if it is

progressive compatible. Set the “Component Resolution” in Setup

menu to “576i/480i” if you are concerned about it (>94). This is the

same for multi system televisions using PAL mode.

≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.

Connecting a television with AUDIO/

VIDEO terminals

Connecting a television with

COMPONENT VIDEO terminals

[Required^setting]

“Component Resolution” setting in the Setup menu (>94)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

L AUDIO OUT

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

AUDIO IN

R L VIDEO

Audio/Video cable

Television’s rear panel

This unit’s rear panel

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

AUDIO OUT

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

AUDIO IN

R L

PRPBY

COMPONENT

VIDEO IN

Component

video cable

Audio cable

Television’s rear panel

This unit’s rear panel

DO NOT

Progressive output

This unit

CRT

Connecting a stereo amplifier

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

AUDIO OUT

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

AUDIO IN

R L

Audio cable

This unit’s rear panel

Amplifier’s rear panel

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 100 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

101

RQT9434

Convenient

functions

[Required^setting]

≥“Digital Audio Output” in the Setup menu (>91)

≥When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an optical digital audio cable or coaxial cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable,

you can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting “HDMI Audio Output” to “Off” in the Setup menu (>93). In this case audio is

only output from the amplifier not the television.

≥Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not included), check the terminal shape of the connected equipment.

∫With OPTICAL ∫With COAXIAL

Connecting VCR or Set Top Box (Terrestrial receiver, CATV, etc.)

MPONENT

DEO OUTOUT

AV1

(TV)

VIDEO

RGB/S VIDEO





AV2

(EXT)

VIDEO

RGB/S VIDEO





This unit’s rear panel

VCR or Set Top Box’s

rear panel

21-pin Scart cable

Connect the unit directly to the television

If you connect the unit through an AV selector or

video cassette recorder to the television, video

signal will be affected by copyright protection

systems and the picture may not be shown

correctly.

≥When connecting to a television with a built-

in VCR

Connect to the input terminals on the television

side if there are both television and VCR input

terminals.

Television

VCR

This unit

DO NOT

Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal

LNB

IN 2

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

OPTICAL IN

Optical digital audio

cable

Do not bend sharply

when connecting.

This unit’s rear panel

Insert the cable so its

shape fits correctly into

the terminal.

Amplifier’s rear panel

DISH

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

COAXIAL IN

Coaxial cable

This unit’s

rear panel

Amplifier’s rear panel

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 101 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

102

RQT9434

Additional connections

When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital

video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to

1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.

≥This unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour, x.v.ColourTM, High Bit Rate Audio) technology (>118, 119).

≥Video sources converted to 1920k1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,

native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.

≥Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).

≥When outputting 1080p signal, please use HDMI Cables 5.0 meters or less.

[Note]

≥If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (>118) and

output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)

≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.

For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input

terminal (PC monitors, etc.):

Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)

Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and receiver

Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI Control

” function

When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be possible.

[>76, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link)]

≥Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.

≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.

Recommended part number:

RP-CDHS15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHS30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHS50 (5.0 m), etc.

10BASE-T/

100BASE-TX

LNB

IN 1

LNB

IN 2

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

AV1

(TV)

VIDEO

RGB/S VIDEO





AV2

(EXT)

VIDEO

RGB/S VIDEO





COMMON INTERFACE

13V/18V

400mA max.

HDMI IN HDMI OUT

HDMI IN

HDMI AV OUT

This unit’s rear

panel

HDMI cable

Television’s rear

panel

Receiver’s rear

panel

[Required^setting]

≥Set “HDMI Video Mode” and “HDMI

Audio Output” to “On” (>93).

(The default setting is “On”.)

Fully wired 21-pin Scart cable

Connecting with a Panasonic TV

(VIERA)

If the 21-pin Scart cable is

connected, the following functions

are available.

≥Direct TV Recording (>76)

≥Pause Live TV programme (>77)

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 102 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

103

RQT9434

Convenient

functions

Following function will be available when this unit is connected to the network.

≥This document is assuming that you already have a broadband connection.

≥This connection is not necessary if following functions are not to be used.

[Note]

≥Refer to the operating instructions for the connected device.

≥It may not work properly depending on the equipment or environment used.

≥Depending on the contract with the provider, you may not be able to connect multiple numbers of terminals such as this unit or computers, or an

additional fee might be required.

≥Use only category 5 straight LAN cables (STP) when connecting to peripheral devices.

≥When operating the VIERA CAST, use high-speed internet service no less than 1.5 Mbps for SD (Standard Definition) and 6 Mbps for HD (High

Definition) picture quality by your local broadband company.

≥If using slow Internet connection, the video may not be displayed correctly.

≥Inserting any cable other than a LAN cable in the LAN terminal can damage the unit.

Network connection

Playing back from other

equipment on the network You can enjoy the video saved on the HDD of this unit on DLNA compatible equipment connected via a

network. (>79)

Enjoying VIERA CASTTM You can access a selection of Internet services from the Home screen with VIERA CAST, for example

YouTube, Picasa Web Albums. (Current as of December 2009) (>78)

≥VIERA CAST requires a broadband Internet connection. Dial-up Internet connections cannot be used.

Enjoying BD-Live discs with

Internet You can enjoy more functions such as subtitles, exclusive images and online games by connecting this unit

to the Internet. (>46)

Automatically acquire the

title of the CD Automatically acquire the title of the CD or the information about the artist. (>75)

Update the software

(firmware) of this unit Automatically update the software (firmware) of this unit. (>98)

≥Update of the software (firmware) can be done from the broadcast too.

≥Make the necessary settings in “Network Settings” after connecting. (>94)

10BASE-T/

100BASE-TX

LNB

IN 1

LNB

IN 2

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

AC IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

AV1

(TV)

VIDEO

RGB/S VIDEO





AV2

(EXT)

VIDEO

RGB/S VIDEO





COMMON INTERFACE

13V/18V

400mA max.

This unit’s rear panel

Internet

Straight LAN cable

Hub or broadband router

Telecommunications

equipment (modem, etc)

≥When your communication equipment (modem), etc. has no broadband

router functions: Connect a broadband router.

When your communication equipment (modem), etc. has broadband

router functions but there are no vacant ports: Connect a hub.

≥The DLNA compatible device that is to be connected to the unit should be

connected to the same hub or broadband router as the unit.

≥Use a router that supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX.

DLNA compatible

equipment

Straight LAN cable

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 103 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

104

RQT9434

Operations that can be performed simultaneously

Reference

(≤: Possible, –: Impossible)

§[AVCHD] It cannot playback.

≥Simultaneous operation is not possible while executing the “DV Automatic Recording” or “Flexible Recording via AV input”.

Language code list

Enter the code with the numbered buttons.

Operations that can be performed while recording or copying a title

Playback of HDD Playback of

discs Playback of BD-

Video Playback of still

pictures

Playback of

music recorded

on HDD

While recording to HDD in DR mode ≤≤≤ –≤

While recording to HDD in XP, SP, LP, EP, or FR

modes ≤≤§––≤

While recording from DV input – – – – –

While copying in normal speed mode – – – – –

While copying in high speed mode

[With finalising or creating Top Menu ([+RW])] –––––

While copying in high speed mode

[Without finalising or creating Top Menu ([+RW])] ≤––––

Starting of the timer recording while executing other operation

Starting of timer recording possible during the following

operations Starting of timer recording not possible during the following

operations

≥Recording the title§1, §2, §3

≥Playing the title§4

≥Editing the title

≥Copying a title in high speed mode (without finalising or creating

Top Menu)

–Only 1 programme can be recorded

≥Executing “DV Automatic Recording”§1, §5

≥Executing “Flexible Recording via AV input”§1, §5

≥Executing Pause Live TV§1, §2

§1Cannot be executed when “One cable” has been selected in Auto

Setup (>18, 87)

§2Executing operation will terminate when 2 programmes

simultaneous recording cannot be performed.

§3While recording an encrypted broadcast, you cannot record

another encrypted broadcast.

§4Playback of disc will terminate when the timer recording to disc is

started while playing back from the disc or when the timer

recording other than the DR mode has started while playing BD-

Video.

§5Executing operation will be terminated.

≥Copying a title in normal speed mode

≥Copying a title in high speed mode (with finalising or creating Top

Menu)

≥Copying HD Video (AVCHD format)

≥Editing still pictures or music

≥Copying still pictures

≥Copying music

≥Formatting

≥Finalising/Creating Top Menu ([+RW])

Abkhazian: 6566

Afar: 6565

Afrikaans: 6570

Albanian: 8381

Amharic: 6577

Arabic: 6582

Armenian: 7289

Assamese: 6583

Aymara: 6589

Azerbaijani: 6590

Bashkir: 6665

Basque: 6985

Bengali; Bangla:6678

Bhutani: 6890

Bihari: 6672

Breton: 6682

Bulgarian: 6671

Burmese: 7789

Byelorussian: 6669

Cambodian: 7577

Catalan: 6765

Chinese: 9072

Corsican: 6779

Croatian: 7282

Czech: 6783

Danish: 6865

Dutch: 7876

English: 6978

Esperanto: 6979

Estonian: 6984

Faroese: 7079

Fiji: 7074

Finnish: 7073

French: 7082

Frisian: 7089

Galician: 7176

Georgian: 7565

German: 6869

Greek: 6976

Greenlandic: 7576

Guarani: 7178

Gujarati: 7185

Hausa: 7265

Hebrew: 7387

Hindi: 7273

Hungarian: 7285

Icelandic: 7383

Indonesian: 7378

Interlingua: 7365

Irish: 7165

Italian: 7384

Japanese: 7465

Javanese: 7487

Kannada: 7578

Kashmiri: 7583

Kazakh: 7575

Kirghiz: 7589

Korean: 7579

Kurdish: 7585

Laotian: 7679

Latin: 7665

Latvian, Lettish: 7686

Lingala: 7678

Lithuanian: 7684

Macedonian: 7775

Malagasy: 7771

Malay: 7783

Malayalam: 7776

Maltese: 7784

Maori: 7773

Marathi: 7782

Moldavian: 7779

Mongolian: 7778

Nauru:7865

Nepali: 7869

Norwegian: 7879

Oriya: 7982

Pashto, Pushto: 8083

Persian: 7065

Polish: 8076

Portuguese: 8084

Punjabi: 8065

Quechua: 8185

Rhaeto-Romance:

8277

Romanian: 8279

Russian: 8285

Samoan: 8377

Sanskrit: 8365

Scots Gaelic: 7168

Serbian: 8382

Serbo-Croatian: 8372

Shona: 8378

Sindhi: 8368

Singhalese: 8373

Slovak: 8375

Slovenian: 8376

Somali: 8379

Spanish: 6983

Sundanese: 8385

Swahili: 8387

Swedish: 8386

Tagalog: 8476

Tajik: 8471

Tamil: 8465

Tatar: 8484

Telugu: 8469

Thai: 8472

Tibetan: 6679

Tigrinya: 8473

Tonga: 8479

Turkish: 8482

Turkmen: 8475

Twi: 8487

Ukrainian: 8575

Urdu: 8582

Uzbek: 8590

Vietnamese: 8673

Volapük: 8679

Welsh: 6789

Wolof: 8779

Xhosa: 8872

Yiddish: 7473

Yor uba: 8979

Zulu: 9085

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 104 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

105

RQT9434

Reference

Frequently asked questions

Refer to the following items if you have any doubts about unit operations.

Can this unit receive or record High Definition

(HD) broadcasts?

¾Yes, this unit can receive or record High Definition (HD)

broadcasts. Record in DR recording mode.

What do I need to play multi channel surround

sound?

¾Connect the appropriate amplifier/receiver to the HDMI AV OUT

terminal, the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (OPTICAL,

COAXIAL). (>101, 102)

Are the headphones and speakers directly

connected to the unit?

¾You cannot directly connect them to the unit. Connect through

the amplifier etc. (>100, 101, 102)

My television has Scart terminal, COMPONENT

VIDEO IN terminals and HDMI IN terminal. Which

should I connect with?

¾The different levels of picture quality input are listed below in

order from highest to lowest.

HDMI IN )COMPONENT VIDEO IN ) Scart)VIDEO IN.

However, it will take longer for the picture output to start up

when this unit is connected with the HDMI IN terminal.

When are the software (firmware) updates

broadcast?

¾The unit shows automatically when a software (firmware)

update has been broadcast, and also automatically updates the

software (firmware) if the time is specified in “Software Update

in Standby”. (>95)

Can I play BD-Video and DVD-Video bought in

another country?

¾Playback of the following discs is not possible. (>Cover)

–BD-Video discs that do not include region “B”.

–DVD-Video discs that do not include region “2” or “ALL”.

Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information.

Can BD-Video/DVD-Video that does not have a

region code/number be played?

¾The region management information for BD-Video/DVD-Video

indicates that the disc conforms to industry standards. You

cannot play discs that do not conform to industry standards or

do not have a region code or number.

Please tell me about disc compatibility with this

unit.

¾Refer to “HDD and disc information”. (>6–10)

Can I record from a commercially purchased

video cassette, Blu-ray Disc or DVD?

¾Most commercially sold video cassettes, Blu-ray Disc and DVD

are copy protected; therefore, recording is usually not possible.

Can the disc recorded with this unit play on other

equipment?

¾Refer to “Play on other players” in “HDD and disc information”.

(>8, 9)

Can I copy to a disc at high speed copy?

¾Yes, you can. (But you may not high speed copy depending on

the disc to copy or the title.) (>54)

Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies.

¾Title in DR mode on the HDD can be copied to BD-RE or BD-R

at high speed.

Is it possible to copy to the disc, SD card, or USB

memory after copying HD video (AVCHD format)

to the HDD?

¾It can be copied to the disc.

–[BD-RE] [BD-R] It can be copied with HD quality.

–[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] It will be copied with

SD quality. (It cannot be copied as it is in HD picture quality.)

¾It cannot be copied to SD card or USB memory.

Is it possible to programme a recording, with a

start and end time that are different from the TV

Guide system?

¾You can change the start and end time of programmes in the

Timer Recording menu. (>35, 90)

Can I receive TV Guide system data via a Set Top

Box?

¾No, only via the built-in tuner. To perform timer recordings with

Set Top Boxes, please use the External Link feature or your

unit’s manual timer programming. (>35, 59)

How can I cancel a TIMER programming?

¾Press [PROG/CHECK] and select the desired entry and then

press [DEL]. (>37)

What happens when I unplug the unit from the

household mains socket?

¾The TV Guide data will not be updated.

¾If the unit is disconnected from the household mains socket for

a longer period of time, the TV Guide data will be lost.

¾Clock setting will be erased and timer recording will not work.

What can or cannot be done using the USB port

on this unit?

¾You can play DivX, MP3 or still picture (JPEG) files on a USB

memory. (>44, 64, 70)

¾You can copy still pictures (JPEG) files on a USB memory to the

HDD, BD-RE or DVD-RAM. (>68)

¾You can copy MP3 files on a USB memory to the HDD. (>75)

¾You can connect a video equipment and copy SD Video to the

HDD or DVD-RAM. (>63)

¾You can connect a video equipment and copy HD Video to the

HDD, BD-RE or BD-R. (>62)

¾Data on the HDD or a disc cannot be transferred to a USB

memory.

¾Data on a USB memory cannot be edited or a USB memory

cannot be formatted on this unit.

¾Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (>11)

What will happen if I try to record the same CD

multiple times?

¾New album will be made following the existing album.

Can I transfer the music tracks from HDD to the

disc or USB memory?

¾No, you cannot.

Regarding Frequently asked questions for copying (>54)

Set up

Disc

Recording

TV Guide

USB

Music

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 105 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

106

RQT9434

Messages

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc

for play on other equipment.

∫To finalise the disc

Press [¥REC] on the main unit.

≥You cannot stop this process once you have started it.

≥If you want to set the background, play menu select or provide a

disc name, select “Top Menu” (>86), “Auto-Play Select” (>86) or

“Disc Name” (>84) in “DVD Management” before finalising.

∫To open the tray without disc finalisation

Press [<OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.

On the television

Authorisation Error. ≥You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a different registration code.

You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX) (>45)

Cannot finish recording completely. ≥The programme was copy-protected.

≥The HDD or disc may be full.

≥The maximum number of programme has been exceeded. (>29)

Cannot play.

Incompatible TV system setting ! ≥You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV system

currently selected on the unit.

Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit. (>93)

Cannot record to the disc. ≥The disc may be dirty or scratched. (>15)

Cannot format.

Cannot play on this unit. ≥You tried to play a non-compatible image. (>116)

≥Turn the unit off and re-insert the USB memory or card. (>15)

No folders. ≥There is no compatible folder in this unit. (>117)

No SD card

No valid SD card. ≥The card is not inserted. If this message is displayed with a compatible card already inserted, turn off

the unit, remove and then re-insert the card. (>15)

≥The card inserted is not compatible or the card format does not match. (>116)

Not enough space in the copy

destination. ≥Create space by deleting any unnecessary items. (>25, 49, 85)

≥Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the “Destination Capacity” is not

exceeded.

The disc is not recordable. ≥The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert an unfinalised disc.

≥You inserted an unformatted disc. (>85)

This disc is not formatted properly.

Rental Expired. ≥The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays. You cannot play it.

$ This operation cannot be

performed now. ≥The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.

–[BD-V]: During playback, reverse slow-motion or reverse frame-by-frame is not possible.

–Depending on the disc, you may not be able to perform search or skip when film previews and

warning screens are being played back.

$ This operation is prohibited by

this disc. ≥Depending on the disc, you may not be able to perform search or skip when film previews and

warning screens are being played back.

When removing a recorded disc

Finalise

Press the REC button to start finalise.

Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit.

This disc cannot be played on other players

without finalising.

Finalise the disc to enable playback on other

DVD players.

Note: Recording or Editing is not possible

after finalising. This may take up to min.

Finalise the disc ?

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 106 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

107

RQT9434

Reference

The following messages or service numbers appear on the unit’s display when something unusual is detected during startup and use.

§The message scrolls on the unit’s display.

On the unit’s display

BD 

(“∑” stands for a number.) ≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.

Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time for more than

5 seconds. (>95)

CAM-UP ≥CAM is being updated. (>98)

GUIDE ≥TV Guide data is being downloaded. (>38)

FINISH ≥The software (firmware) update is complete. (>98)

HARD ERR§≥If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.

NoERAS ≥You cannot delete items on this disc.

The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.

NoREAD ≥The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit. (>15)

≥This message may appear when the lens cleaner has finished cleaning.

Press [<OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc. (>14)

NoWRIT ≥You cannot write to this disc.

The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.

PLEASE WAIT§≥Displayed when the unit is started and turned off. This is not malfunction. It takes some minutes until the

message disappears depending on the status of the unit. You can not turn the unit on while the message is

displayed.

≥There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying out its

recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not broken. Wait until the

message disappears.

PROG FULL§≥There are already 64 timer programmes. Delete unnecessary timer programmes. (>37)

REMOVE ≥The USB device is drawing too much power. Remove the USB device.

START ≥Update of the software (firmware) is started.

You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete. (>98)

SW-DL ≥Software (firmware) is downloading.

Download will stop when the power is turned on, or the timer recording starts. (>98)

UNFORMAT§≥You inserted an unformatted BD-RE, BD-R, DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL, or DVD-RW

(DVD-Video format) that has been recorded on other equipment.

Format the disc to use it. (>85)

However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted.

UNSUPPORT§≥You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on. (>6–10)

≥You tried to operate with a non-compatible USB memory.

UPD /

(“∑” stands for a number.) ≥The software (firmware) is being updated.

You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete. (>98)

U50 ≥The terminal, antenna cable or dish is short-circuited as for both LNB IN 1 and LNB IN 2. Check the connection

status. (>17)

U50 1 ≥The terminal, antenna cable or dish is short-circuited as for LNB IN 1. Check the connection status. (>17)

U50 2 ≥The terminal, antenna cable or dish is short-circuited as for LNB IN 2. Check the connection status. (>17)

U59 ≥The unit is hot.

The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message disappears.

Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear of the unit.

U61 ≥(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred during recording, playback or copy. This

is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not broken. Once the

display clears you can use the unit again.

U72

U73 ≥The HDMI connection acts unusually.

– The connected equipment is not HDMI compatible.

– Please use HDMI cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).

– The HDMI cable is damaged.

U76 ≥HDMI cannot be output because you are connected to a model that does not support copyright protection.

U77 ≥Due to the current disc not having authorised copyright information, video output is not performed.

U88 ≥(When a disc is inserted) Displays when there was something unusual detected with the disc while recording,

playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not

broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again. (>108)

U99 ≥The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby mode. Now press [Í/

I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.

H or F ≥ There is something unusual. (The service number displayed after H and F depends on the unit’s condition.)

≥Check the unit using the troubleshooting guide. If the service number does not disappear, do the following.

(>108–114)

1. Disconnect the plug from the household mains socket, wait a few seconds, then reconnect it.

2. Press [Í/I] to turn the power on. (The unit may be fixed.)

If the service number does not disappear despite after doing the above, request service from the dealer. Inform

the dealer of the service number when requesting service.

X HOLD ≥The HOLD function is activated.

Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] at the same time until “X HOLD” disappears. (>99)

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 107 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

108

RQT9434

Troubleshooting guide

Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart

do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.

Updating to the latest software (firmware) may solve the problem. (>98)

No power.

The unit does not turn on pressing [Í].

¾Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active

household mains socket. (>17)

The unit switches to standby mode.

¾One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I] on the

main unit to turn the unit on.

The power is turned off automatically.

¾If you connected this unit to a “HDAVI Control” compatible TV

with an HDMI cable, or connected this unit to a Q Link-

compatible TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable, this unit will

be automatically set to standby mode when the TV is set to

standby mode.

This unit turns off when the TV input is switched.

¾If connected with an HDAVI Control 4 compatible TV (VIERA)

with the “Intelligent Auto Standby” setting activated on the TV,

when switching the TV input, the unit will be automatically

turned to standby. For details please read the operating

instructions of the TV.

The display is dim.

¾Change “Unit’s Display” in the Setup menu. (>92)

“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s display.

¾Set the clock. (>95)

The time recorded on the disc and the available

time shown do not add up.

The displayed time of this unit is different from

the actual recording time.

¾Times shown may disagree with actual times.

¾[BD-R] [-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The remaining capacity does not

increase even if titles are deleted.

¾Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or

+RW increases only when the last recorded title is deleted. It

does not increase if other titles are deleted.

¾If you record or edit about 200 times or more, the remaining

capacity of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R, and +R DL is reduced and

then recording or editing may be disabled (for the second layer

on DVD-R DL and +R DL, this happens after about 60 times).

¾While searching, the elapsed time may not display correctly.

Compared to the actual recorded time, the

elapsed time displayed is less.

(Only when recording in NTSC)

¾The displayed recording/play time is converted from the

number of frames at 29.97 frames (equal to 0.999 seconds) to

one second. There will be a slight difference between the time

displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual one-hour

elapsed time may display as approximately 59 minutes 56

seconds). This does not affect the recording.

The clock does not display on the unit when

switched to standby.

¾The clock does not display when “Power Save” is set to “On”.

Ensure “Power Save” is set to “Off”. (>95)

Available disc space display is showing different

from what was used

¾Available disc space display may be different from actual.

Varying may be large especially when recorded in DR mode.

“U88” is displayed and the disc cannot be

ejected.

¾The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following

to eject the disc.

1Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.

If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on

the main unit for about 3 seconds. The unit is forcibly

switched to standby.

2 While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH W] on the

main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the

disc.

Television reception worsens after connecting

the unit.

¾This can occur because the signals are being divided between

the unit and other equipment. It can be solved by using a signal

booster, available from audio-visual suppliers. If it is not solved

by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.

The digital channel information or Control Panel

does not appear.

¾Select the length of time (3–10 sec.) that the “On-Screen

Messages” in the Setup menu will be displayed. (>92)

¾The digital channel information will not appear during playback.

¾The Control Panel is only displayed when connected to a TV

with “HDAVI Control 2” or later. (>77)

Picture does not appear during timer recording.

¾Timer recordings work regardless whether the unit is on or off.

To confirm the timer recording is going to work properly, turn the

unit on.

Screen size is wrong.

¾Use the television to change the aspect. If your television does

not have that function, set “HDMI Video Mode” in the Setup

menu to “Off” (>93) and “Component Resolution” to “576i/

480i”. (>94)

¾Check the following setting in the Setup menu. (>92)

– “TV Aspect”, “Aspect for 4:3 Video”

¾Check “Aspect for Recording” before recording or file

conversion. (>90)

¾If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” in the

Setup menu to “16:9”. (>92)

It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to

your television’s operating instructions.

The following do not indicate a problem with this

unit:

≥Regular disc rotating sounds.

≥Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.

≥Image disturbance during search.

≥Interruptions in reception due to periodic satellite broadcasting

breaks.

≥Operations are slow to respond in power save mode.

≥Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again

using a Panasonic disc.)

≥The unit freezes due to one of its safety devices being

activated. (Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for

3 seconds.)

≥When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected

sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.

Power

Displays

TV screen and video

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 108 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

109

RQT9434

Reference

Pictures do not appear with the HD quality

although HD setting was made.

¾Even if this unit is connected to a TV through COMPONENT

VIDEO terminals and the Component Resolution is set to 720p

or 1080i, the pictures of HD broadcast output from this unit are

output with 576p/480p.

The screen changes automatically.

¾If there is no operation for 5 minutes or more, the displayed

screen switches to the other states automatically. (only when

the “Screen Saver” in Setup menu is set to “On”.) (>92)

The recorded title is stretched vertically.

¾It may have been recorded with 4:3 aspect ratio. You will be

able to view in 16:9 aspect ration by setting the “Aspect for 4:3

Video” in Setup menu to “4:3”. (>92)

¾If the 16:9 aspect ratio image is output to a 4:3 TV connected

with the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal or the HDMI AV

OUT terminal, it will be stretched vertically. Adjust by the aspect

ratio setting on the TV. If you cannot make the adjustment, set

the “Component Resolution” in the Setup menu to “576p/480p”

and “HDMI Video Format” to “576p/480p”. (>93, 94)

¾16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the

following cases.

–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If you recorded or copied using “EP” or “FR

(recordings 5 hours or longer)” recording mode.

–If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW.

–If you recorded with the “Aspect for Recording” set to “4:3” in

the Setup menu. (>90)

When you want to record 16:9 programme in the same

aspect, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set the

“Aspect for Recording” to “16:9”. (>90)

It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer

to your television’s operating instructions.

There is a lot of after-image when playing video.

¾Set “HD optimizer” in the Picture menu to “Off”. (>82)

When playing DVD-Video using progressive

output, one part of the picture momentarily

appears to be doubled up.

¾This problem is caused by the editing method or material used

on DVD-Video, but should be corrected if you use interlaced

output.

If outputting from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal, set

“Component Resolution” to “576i/480i” in the Setup menu.

(>94)

There is no apparent change in picture quality

when adjusted with the Picture menu in the on-

screen menus.

¾The effect is less perceivable with some types of video.

The images from this unit do not appear on the

television.

Picture is distorted.

¾Make sure that the television is connected to the AV1 terminal,

the VIDEO OUT terminal, COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals

or HDMI terminal on this unit. (>17, 100)

¾Make sure that the television’s input setting is correct.

¾When “Component Resolution” in the Setup menu is set to

“576p/480p” or “720p”, but the connected television is not

progressive compatible, press and hold [∫] and [1](PLAY) on

the main unit at the same time for more than 5 seconds to

cancel this setting. The setting will change to interlace.

¾The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used

by the disc now playing. While stopped, keep pressing [∫] and

[<OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds. The

system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa. (>93)

¾When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc that

matches with this unit’s TV system.

¾Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are

connected with HDMI cables.

Reduce the number of connected devices.

The picture is distorted during play, or video will

not play correctly.

¾You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor

reception or unfavourable weather conditions.

¾The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear

briefly between recorded titles in the following situations:

– between titles recorded with different recording modes.

– between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios.

– between scenes recorded with different resolutions.

– between playlist chapters.

¾Make sure the connections are pushed firmly. (>17, 100–103)

No sound.

Low volume.

Distorted sound.

Cannot hear the desired audio type.

¾Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings.

Check the input mode on the amplifier if you have connected

one. (>17, 91, 100–103)

¾Check if TV is muted.

¾Check if amplifier is muted.

¾Sound is not output while fast-forwarding during chasing

playback and simultaneous record and playback.

¾Press [AUDIO] to select the audio. (>40)

¾Turn the “Sound Effects” in the Sound menu to “Off” in the

following cases. (>82)

– When using discs that do not have surround sound effects

such as Karaoke discs.

– When playing bilingual broadcast titles.

¾Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are

connected with HDMI cables.

Reduce the number of connected devices.

¾Audio may not be output due to how files were created. (DivX)

¾The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is

output from the HDMI AV OUT terminal or the DIGITAL AUDIO

OUT terminal.

¾To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable,

set “HDMI Audio Output” to “On” in the Setup menu. (>93)

¾Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be

distorted if this unit is connected with an HDMI cable.

¾When “BD-Video Secondary Audio” is set to “On”, Dolby Digital

Plus, Dolby TrueHD, and DTS-HD are converted to 48 kHz

Dolby Digital and output. In this case, set the “BD-Video

Secondary Audio” to “Off”. (>91)

Cannot switch audio.

¾You cannot switch the audio (L, R) in the following cases.

– When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP

Recording” is set to “LPCM”. (>92)

– When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”. (The default

setting is “On”). (>90)

¾The amplifier is connected using an optical digital audio cable, a

coaxial cable or an HDMI cable. You cannot switch the audio if

“Dolby D/Dolby D +/Dolby TrueHD”, “DTS/DTS-HD” or “MPEG”

is set to “Bitstream”. Set “Dolby D/Dolby D +/Dolby TrueHD”,

“DTS/DTS-HD” or “MPEG” to “PCM” or connect using audio

cables. (>91, 101, 102)

¾There are discs for which audio cannot be changed because of

how the disc was created.

Sound

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 109 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

110

RQT9434

Troubleshooting guide

Cannot operate the television.

The remote control doesn’t work.

¾Change the manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be

operated even if you change the code. (>99)

¾The remote control and main unit are using different codes.

Change the code on the remote control. (>95)

Press and hold [OK] and the indicated

number button at the same time for more

than 5 seconds.

¾The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones. (>3)

¾You are not pointing the remote control at the main unit’s

remote control signal sensor during operation. (>3)

¾Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.

¾Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that

may be subject to sunlight exposure.

¾Software (firmware) is updating when “UPD /” is displaying

on the unit’s display. Wait until the update is completed. (>98)

¾It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again

after changing the batteries. (>95)

¾It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after

changing the batteries. (>99)

¾The HOLD function is activated. (>99)

The unit is on but cannot be operated.

¾Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected

properly.

¾Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.

¾The unit is hot (“U59” appears on the display). Wait for “U59” to

disappear.

¾One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.

Reset the unit as follows:

1Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.

If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on

the main unit for about 3 seconds. The unit is forcibly

switched to standby.

Alternatively, disconnect the AC mains lead, wait one

minute, then reconnect it.

2Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit still

cannot be operated, consult the dealer.

Cannot eject disc.

¾The unit is recording.

¾The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, press and

hold [∫] and [CH W] on the main unit at the same time for about

5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer.

If the HOLD function is activated, above operation does not

work. Cancel the HOLD function. (>99)

Cannot tune channels.

¾Check the connections.

Startup is slow.

¾Startup takes time in the following situations:

–A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.

–The clock is not set.

–Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is

connected.

–When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.

¾Set “Power Save” to “Off” in the Setup menu. (>95)

This is a normal phenomenon when using VIERA Link (HDAVI

Control 4 or later). For details please read the operating

instructions for the TV.

Cannot record.

Cannot copy.

¾You can not record to the disc by pressing the [¥REC] or timer

recording.

¾BD-RE with a cartridge cannot be copied.

¾[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] The disc is

unformatted. Format the disc. (>85)

¾The disc is protected with DVD Management or Blu-ray Disc

Management. (>84)

¾You cannot record/copy when there is not enough space or

when the number of titles has reached its limit. Delete

unwanted titles or use a new disc. (>25, 49, 85)

¾[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] In the following situations,

you cannot copy. Delete unnecessary titles from the HDD and

then copy. (>25, 49, 85)

– If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will

copy titles from the HDD to a blank disc and fill the entire disc,

HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode recording

is necessary).

– If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be

copied has exceeded 999.

¾You cannot copy on finalised discs. However, you can record

and copy again if you format BD-RE and DVD-RW.

¾Due to peculiarities of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-

Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW you may be unable to

record onto or edit them if you either insert and remove the disc

or switch the unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a total of

30 times.

¾Discs recorded on equipment other than this unit may not be

able to be copied to.

¾This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have

PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes

can be recorded/copied onto the HDD, BD-RE or BD-R.)

Play of discs recorded with both PAL and NTSC on another unit

is not guaranteed.

¾Some broadcasts are copyright protected.

Cannot record from external equipment.

¾Check that the connection is correct. (>60, 101)

¾The proper external input channel (AV2, AV3, or DV) is not

selected. Press [INPUT SELECT] to change.

¾Select the input channel for the equipment you have connected.

¾Recording-restricted or copy-restricted programmes may not be

recorded.

Cannot record 2 programmes simultaneously.

¾It cannot in following conditions.

– One satellite cable is connected to this unit.

– “One cable” has been selected in Auto Setup (>18, 22, 87)

– Record 2 programmes from external input

– When performing high speed copying (1 programme can be

recorded to HDD)

– Recording from DV input, while recording to discs with

“Flexible Recording via AV input” function.

Operation Recording, timer recording and

copying

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 110 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

111

RQT9434

Reference

The recording lacks the beginning or ending part

of the programme although the timer recording

was set on TV Guide.

¾This occurs when the broadcast signals are not correct. We

recommend you set the timer again, allowing enough time for

the start and end time. (>90)

Timer recording does not stop even when [∫] is

pressed.

¾When using the linked timer recording with external equipment,

press [EXT LINK]. (“EXT-L” on the unit’s display disappears.)

(>59)

Timer recording does not work properly.

¾The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme

times overlap ( is displayed). Correct the programme.

(>37)

¾The programme is not in timer recording standby. (The timer

icon “F” (red) in the timer recording list is grey.) (>36)

¾Set the clock. (>95)

The timer programme remains even after

recording finishes.

¾The timer programme remains if set to daily or weekly. (>35)

A part or whole of a recorded title has been lost.

¾If there is a power failure or the AC mains lead is disconnected

from the household mains socket while recording or editing, the

title may be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable.

You will have to format the disc ([HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM] [-RW‹V›]

[+RW]) or use a new disc. We cannot offer any guarantee

regarding lost programmes or discs. (>85, 90)

¾If you use Auto Renewal Recording, the old title will be deleted

after the new title is recorded. (>36)

Cannot copy to a disc using the high speed

mode.

¾High speed copying cannot be performed depending on the

disc or title that is being copied. Refer to “When is high speed

copy not possible?” for details. (>54)

When copying, it takes a long time even when

high speed mode is selected.

¾Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if

the disc is high speed recording compatible, the maximum

speed may not be possible due to the condition of the disc.

¾It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.

¾You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours

when using other Panasonic DVD Recorders that are not

compatible with EP (8 hours) mode recording.

An unusually loud sound is coming from the

rotating disc.

¾When recording or high speed copying to a disc, the sound of

the disc rotating may be louder than normal, however, this is not

a problem.

¾If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal

( Silent )” in “BD / DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the

Setup menu. (>90)

The quality has dropped when the title in HDD is

copied to the disc.

¾Titles in HD quality (titles recorded in DR mode or titles in

AVCHD) will be copied as SD quality when copied to [RAM] [-R]

[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW].

The DV automatic recording function does not

work.

¾If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted,

check the connections and DV equipment settings. (>60)

¾You cannot start recording until the images from the DV

equipment appear on the television.

¾Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes

on the tape in the DV equipment are not successive.

¾Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording may

not operate properly.

¾The audio/video recordings are recorded on other than a DV

tape. (>61)

You cannot press [INPUT SELECT] to select

external input other than AV2.

¾You cannot select external input other than AV2 when this unit

is in EXT LINK Standby mode or recording. Press [EXT LINK] to

cancel EXT LINK Standby mode. (>59)

Recorded title cannot be played back anymore.

¾There are some titles that are copyright protected (Copying is

prohibited) for which the playback is disabled after a

predetermined time. (>31)

Play fails to start even when [1](PLAY) is

pressed.

Play starts but then stops immediately.

¾Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up. (>15)

¾The disc is dirty, scratched or marked. (>15)

¾You tried to play a blank disc or disc unplayable on this unit.

(>10)

¾You tried to play a +RW that needs to have a top menu on the

equipment used for recording.

¾When recording to DVD-RAM using EP (8 hours) mode, play

may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with

DVD-RAM. In this case use EP (6 hours) mode. (>90)

¾You cannot playback while executing the “Flexible Recording

via AV input” or when recording from the DV input.

¾If playing DivX VOD content, refer to the homepage where you

purchased it. (DivX)

¾Make sure that the TV is turned on. If the menu or messages

are displayed, follow the on-screen instructions.

¾Set “Play Video ( AVCHD ) on BD-RE / BD-R” to “On” for the

disc that has high definition video (AVCHD) recorded by the

Panasonic’s video camera, etc. and other video format such as

those recorded on this unit. (>89)

Play

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 111 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

112

RQT9434

Troubleshooting guide

Audio and video momentarily pause.

¾This occurs between playlist chapters.

¾This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles

on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),

+R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using the high

speed mode.

¾This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.

¾[-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers, the

unit automatically switches between layers and plays the title in

the same way as a normal programme. However, video and

audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching

layers. (>40)

BD-Video or DVD-Video is not played.

¾You have set a ratings level to limit BD-Video or DVD-Video

play. Change this setting. (>89)

¾Ensure the disc is for the correct BD-Video region code or DVD-

Video region number, and is not defective. (>Cover)

¾[BD-V] You cannot playback while recording from external

equipment.

Alternative soundtrack and subtitles cannot be

selected.

¾The languages are not recorded on the disc.

¾You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the

soundtrack and subtitles on some discs. Use the disc’s menus

to make changes. (>21)

No subtitles.

¾Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.

¾Turn the subtitles on. Set “Subtitles” on the on-screen menu to

“On”. (>81)

Angle cannot be changed.

¾Angles can only be changed during scenes where different

angles are recorded.

You have forgotten your ratings PIN.

You want to cancel the ratings level.

¾The ratings level returns to the factory preset. While the disc

tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the BD drive,

then press and hold [¥REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit

at the same time for 5 or more seconds (“INIT” will appear on

the unit’s display).

Image for the Quick View is not smooth.

¾Image may not be played back smoothly in case of DR, HG,

HX, HE, HL mode titles or [BD-V] [AVCHD].

¾This function does not work when recording is in XP or FR

mode.

The resume play function does not work.

¾Memorized positions are cancelled when

–open the disc tray.

–[SD] [CD] [USB] turn off the power.

([HDD] will not be cancelled)

¾This function does not work for Some BD-Video disc that

contains BD-J.

Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. does not work.

Slow-motion playback does not go reverse.

Reverse frame-by-frame does not work properly.

¾Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings

are different from the title recorded on the disc. (>93)

¾Slow-motion playback in reverse does not work for [BD-V]

[AVCHD].

¾[BD-V] [AVCHD] Reverse frame-by-frame cannot be done.

¾Frame-by-frame backward for titles that have copied the

AVCHD will be reversed in 10 frame units.

¾Slow-motion and frame-by-frame do not work with the title

recorded from radio service.

It takes time before play starts.

¾This is normal on DivX video. (DivX)

Picture stops.

¾Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 2 GB. (DivX).

Cannot see the beginning of the title played.

¾(If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI

cable)

When [1] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control, you

may not be able to see the beginning of the title played until the

picture is displayed on the TV. Using [:], return to the

beginning of the title.

The available recording time doesn’t increase

even after deleting titles on the disc.

¾Available space on BD-R, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R, or +R DL

does not increase even after deleting previous titles.

¾Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW

increases when you delete the last title.

Cannot edit.

¾You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available

space.

Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space. (>25)

Cannot format.

¾The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.

(>15)

¾Disc may be defective or of poor quality.

¾You tried formatting a disc that you may not be able to use in

this unit. (>10)

Cannot create chapters.

Cannot mark the start point or the end point

during “Partial Delete” operation.

¾The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when

you turn it off or remove the disc.

¾These operations are not possible with still pictures.

¾You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You

cannot set an end point before a start point.

Cannot delete chapters.

¾[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] When the chapter is too short to

delete, use “Combine Chapters” to make the chapter longer.

(>51)

Cannot create a playlist.

¾Creation or editing of playlists cannot be done on this unit.

Cannot display Picture View screen.

¾This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy.

Cannot edit or format a card.

¾Release the card’s protection setting. (>11)

Edit

Still pictures

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 112 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

113

RQT9434

Reference

The contents of the card cannot be read.

¾Remove the card from the slot and then insert again. If this

does not solve the problem, turn off and turn on the unit again.

¾The card format is not compatible with the unit. (The contents

on the card may be damaged.) (>11)

¾This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD

Card Specifications FAT12 and FAT16 formats, as well as

SDHC Memory Cards in FAT32 format.

¾The card contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that

are not compatible with this unit. (>117)

¾You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to

2 GB and SDHC Memory Cards with capacities from 4 GB to

32 GB.

Copying, deleting and setting protection takes a

long time.

¾When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes take

a few hours.

¾When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a

long time. Format the disc or card. (>85)

Still pictures (JPEG) do not playback normally.

¾The images that were edited on the PC, such as Progressive

JPEG, etc., may not play back. (>116)

Tracks could not be copied to the HDD.

¾If there are copyright protected tracks such as SCMS

restrictions, they will not be copied.

¾Recording from CDs that do not conform to CD-DA

specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.

¾Bonus tracks may not be copied.

Title of the newly released CD cannot be

acquired.

¾Title cannot be acquired if the title is not registered in the built-in

GracenoteR database. Connection to the network is necessary

to acquire title for the newly released CD. (>103)

ID3 tag of a MP3 file is not completely displayed.

¾Only the track name and artist name can be displayed with this

unit.

The contents of the USB memory cannot be read.

¾Remove the USB memory from the USB port and then insert

again. If this does not solve the problem, turn off and turn on the

unit again.

¾Check that the USB memory is inserted correctly. (>15)

¾The format of the USB memory or of its contents is not

compatible with the unit. (The contents on the USB memory

may be damaged.) (>11)

¾The USB memory contains a folder structure and/or file

extensions that are not compatible with this unit. (>117)

¾USB memories connected using a USB extension cable or a

USB hub may not be recognized by this unit.

¾Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (>11)

¾If inserted during playback, recording or copying etc., the USB

memory may not be recognized by this unit.

¾You can use USB memories with capacities up to 128 GB.

USB memory cannot be operated.

¾Turn the power of this unit off once, and turn it back on. If it

cannot be operated after that, set “VIERA Link” to “Off” and turn

the power of this unit off again, and turn it back on. (>93)

The TV Guide System does not receive any data.

¾Check whether the clock is properly set. (>95)

¾If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception), the

TV Guide system may not be able to receive any data.

The empty field is displayed for some or all

stations.

¾Some stations are not supported by the TV Guide system.

¾Programme the Timer recording manually. (>35)

The TV Guide information is not displayed

properly.

¾There was a programme change, or TV Guide information from

a broadband cast station was possibly not correctly transmitted.

Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for the TV

Guide system provider or station provider.

The TV Guide data transfer was interrupted.

¾The TV Guide system shows the data that was received up to

the interruption.

¾The programme information may be incomplete.

The TV Guide data is not updated.

¾Make sure that the time is set correctly. (>95)

Digital broadcasts cannot be received.

¾The dish may not be pointing in the direction of the satellite, or

the direction of the dish may have changed due to strong winds

or vibration. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial

installer.

¾Reception may be disturbed in bad weather.

¾To record an encrypted broadcast, a CAM (Conditional Access

Module) with Smart Card valid for the broadcast is required.

TV reception worsens after connecting the unit.

¾This can occur because the signals are being divided between

the unit and other equipment. It can be solved by using a signal

booster, available from electronics retailers.

The digital channel information does not appear.

¾Select the length of time (3–10 sec.) in the “On-Screen

Messages” in the Setup menu. (>92)

¾The digital satellite channel information will not appear during

playback.

Music

USB

TV Guide

Digital broadcast

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 113 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

114

RQT9434

Troubleshooting guide

Picture regularly breaks up on some channels.

“No signal” message is displayed.

¾Check aerial connection.

¾Check that the satellite dish and satellite cable are designed for

DVB.

¾Check “Signal Condition”. If “Signal Quality” or “Signal Strength”

are displayed in red or constantly changing, check aerial. If

problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer. (>88)

¾Interference (known as impulse noise) from household

appliances such as light switches, fridges etc. may cause

picture break up and/or audio distortion. Use a high quality

quad shielded coaxial cable fly lead between this unit and

antenna wall socket to minimise impulse noise pickup. If

problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.

¾Check the reception capacity of the satellite dish. The dish must

be large enough for good reception. There must not be any

hindrances in the way which could impair reception, e.g. twigs,

leaves, snow.

¾Adjust the aerial reception with “Manual Tuning” in the Setup

menu. (>88)

¾The receiver (LNB) of the satellite dish must be suitable for

digital reception.

Picture very infrequently breaks up on some or

all channels.

¾Electrical atmospheric interference caused by local or distant

lighting storms or heavy rain with wind in “leafy” locations may

cause pictures to break up and audio to mute or distort

momentarily.

¾Impulse noise interference from an infrequently used electrical

appliance, or a passing vehicle or lawn mower with a “noisy”

ignition system.

¾The reception capacity of the satellite dish is not sufficient.

After the Auto-setup, there aren’t any stations in

the station list.

¾“Shipping Condition” was performed or the unit was in the

delivery status. The Auto-setup was then started and

interrupted.

Do an Auto-setup again and let it continue right through to the

end. The data is only saved after this has been completed.

VIERA Link doesn’t work.

¾Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is

displayed on the front display when the power for the main unit

is set to On.

¾Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”. (>93)

¾Check the “HDAVI Control” settings on the connected device.

¾Some functions may not work if depending on the version of

“HDAVI Control” of the connected equipment. This unit supports

“HDAVI Control 4” functions.

¾If the connection for the equipment connected with HDMI was

changed, or if there was a power failure or the plug was

removed from the household mains socket, “HDAVI Control”

may not work.

In this case, perform the following operations.

1 When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with the

power on, turn the TV (VIERA) on again.

2 Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “HDAVI Control”

function to off, and then set to on again. (For more

information, see the VIERA operating instructions.)

3 Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this unit,

and after this unit’s screen is displayed check that “HDAVI

Control” is working.

The Control Panel does not appear.

¾The Control Panel is only displayed when connected to a TV

with “HDAVI Control 2” or later function. (>77)

The operation on this unit (music playback etc.)

is interrupted.

¾The operation on this unit may be interrupted when you press

buttons on the TV remote control that do not work for VIERA

Link functions.

To return all the settings other than the main ones

to the factory preset

¾Select “Yes” in “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu. All the

settings except for the ratings level and ratings PIN, etc. return

to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also

cancelled. (>95)

¾Select “Yes” in “Default Settings” in the Setup menu. All the

settings other than the tuning settings, clock settings, language

settings, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings PIN,

remote control code, network settings, etc. return to the factory

presets. (>95)

¾Press and hold [XCH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the

Auto Setup screen appears. All the settings except for the

ratings level, ratings PIN and clock settings, etc. return to the

factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also

cancelled.

To reset the ratings level settings

¾While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select

the BD drive, then press and hold [¥REC] and [1] (PLAY) on

the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.

To restore the unit if it freezes due to one of the

safety devices being activated

¾Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 3 seconds. (The

settings remain.)

I can’t connect to the network.

¾Has the LAN cable become unplugged? Check that the LAN

cable is properly connected. (>103)

¾Have you plugged in a modular cable for use with a telephone

into the LAN terminal on this unit? Connect with a straight LAN

cable. (>103)

¾Is the power for the modem or broadband router turned on?

Turn the power on for each device.

¾Is there a mistake in the network settings? Follow any

instructions you may have received from your ISP (Internet

Service Provider) and make changes to the settings.

¾Are the broadband router settings correct? Read the operating

instructions for the broadband router.

¾Is the broadband router and/or modem correctly connected?

Check the operating instructions for each device and connect

accordingly.

While using my PC, I cannot connect to the

network.

¾Does your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or service contract

prevent multiple terminals connecting at the same time? Check

the content of your contract.

After performing an update, you can no longer

receive broadcasts.

¾Depending on the content of the update, some settings may

have returned to the preset values. Fix the settings again.

Cannot set “On” in “BD-Video 24p Output”.

¾Only when the unit is connected to the HDMI terminal of a TV

supporting 24p you can select “On”. In some cases where the

unit is connected to a TV via an amplifier/receiver through the

HDMI terminals, you may not be able to select “On”. In this

case, connect the unit to a TV through the HDMI terminal and

connect it to the amplifier/receiver through any terminal other

than HDMI.

Pause Live TV stops.

¾Pause Live TV from AV1, AV2 or AV3 input stops when a timer

recording from external input started.

VIERA Link

To reset this unit

Network

Other

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 114 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

115

RQT9434

Reference

Specifications

Recording system

BD-RE (SL/DL): Blu-ray Disc Rewritable Format

BD-R (SL/DL): Blu-ray Disc Recordable Format

DVD-RAM: DVD Video Recording format

DVD-R: DVD-Video format

DVD-R DL (Dual Layer): DVD-Video format

DVD-RW: DVD-Video format

+R DL (Double Layer)

+RW

Recordable discs

BD-RE (SL/DL): 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)

BD-R (SL/DL): 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2),

1-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)

1-2X SPEED LTH type (Ver. 1.2)

DVD-RAM: 2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),

2-3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1), 2-5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)

DVD-R (SL): 1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),

1-8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)

DVD-R (DL): 2-4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2-8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0)

DVD-RW: 1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),

2-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)

+R (SL): 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),

2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2.4-16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)

+R (DL): 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)

+RW: 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)

Playable discs

BD-RE (SL/DL): BD-RE Ver. 2.1 conforming, JPEG

BD-R (SL/DL): BD-R LTH TYPE Ver. 1.2 conforming,

BD-R Ver. 1.3 conforming

BD-Video

DVD-RAM§1: DVD Video Recording format, AVCHD format, JPEG

DVD-R: DVD-Video format§2, AVCHD format§2

, MP3

2, 3

, JPEG

2, 3

DivX

2, 3

DVD-R DL (Dual Layer): DVD-Video format§2, AVCHD format§2

MP3

2, 3

, JPEG

2, 3

, DivX

2, 3

DVD-RW: DVD-Video format§

, DVD Video Recording format,

AVCHD format§

+R§2, +R DL (Double Layer)§2, +RW

DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA)

CD-R/CD-RW: CD-DA

, MP3

2, 3

, JPEG

2, 3

, DivX

2, 3

Optical pick-up System with 2 lens, 3 integration units

(405 nm wavelength for BDs,

661 nm wavelength for DVDs, 783 nm wavelength for CDs)

LASER specification

Class 1 LASER Product

Wave length:

Laser power:

No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection

Video

Video system: PAL/NTSC

Recording system: MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)/MPEG-4 AVC/H.264

Video in (PAL/NTSC):

AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

S-Video in (PAL/NTSC): AV2 (21 pin) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

RGB in (PAL): AV2 (21 pin), 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

Video out (PAL/NTSC):

AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

S-Video out (PAL/NTSC): AV1 (21 pin) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

RGB out (PAL/NTSC):AV1 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠, termination

Component video output

(PAL 576i/576p/720p/1080i, NTSC 480i/480p/720p/1080i)

Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

PB: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

PR: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

Audio

Recording system: Dolby Digital 2ch (XP, SP, LP, EP, FR mode),

Linear PCM (XP mode),

Dolby Digital Max 5.1ch (DVB-S/S2) (DR, HG, HX, HE, HL mode)

Dolby Digital Plus Max 5.1ch (DVB-S/S2) (DR mode)

MPEG 2ch (DR mode)

Audio in: AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (pin jack)

Input level: Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz

Input impedance: More than 10 k≠

Audio out: AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack)

Output level: Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz

Output impedance: Less than 1 k≠

Digital audio out: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)

Coaxial terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)

HDMI terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG, Dolby Digital

Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High

Resolution Audio)

HDMI Output 19 pin type A: 1 pc

HDMI™ (V.1.3a with Deep Colour, x.v.ColourTM, High Bit Rate Audio)

≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 4” function.

Internal HDD capacity [BS850] 500 GB

[BS750] 250 GB

DV Input IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 pin: 1 pc

USB Port Type A: 1 pc

SD Card Slot 1 pc

LAN (Ethernet) Port 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX

CI (Common Interface) Slot EN 50221 Standard,

2 slot Type I and II PC Card (5 V only) rear side

Television system

Tuner System: DVB-S/S2

Antenna receive frequency: 950 MHz to 2150 MHz

Input level: –65 dBm to –25 dBm

Input impedance: Nominal 75 ≠

Demodulation: QPSK, 8PSK

LNB input: F shape terminal female, power supply 13 V/18 V

max. 400 mA

LNB output: Not provided

RF converter output: Not provided

DiSEqC: Version 1.0 or Tone burst A/B, 22 kHz 0.65 Vp-p

Others

Region code:

Operating temperature: 5 oC to 40 oC

Operating humidity range: 10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)

Power supply: AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz

Power consumption: [BS850] Approx. 65 W

[BS750] Approx. 64 W

Dimensions (WkHkD):

[BS850] 430 mmk66 mmk239 mm (excluding the projecting parts)

430 mmk66 mmk259 mm (including the projecting parts)

[BS750] 430 mmk59 mmk239 mm (excluding the projecting parts)

430 mmk59 mmk259 mm (including the projecting parts)

Mass: [BS850] Approx. 3.3 kg

[BS750] Approx. 3.2 kg

CD 783 nm wave length

DVD 661 nm wave length

BD 405 nm wave length

DVD: #2

BD: Region B

Power consumption in standby mode:

Approx. 0.3 W (“Power Save” is set to “On”)

Approx. 7 W (“Power Save” is set to “Off”)

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 115 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

116

RQT9434

Specifications

SD Card

Slot: SD Memory Card slot: 1 pc

Compatible media: SD Memory Card§4, SDHC Memory Card

Format: FAT12, FAT16§5 (In case of SD Memory Card)

FAT32§5 (In case of SDHC Memory Card)

Data that can be played: JPEG, SD (Standard Definition)-Video§6,

HD (High Definition)-Video

USB device

USB standard: USB 2.0 High Speed

Format: FAT16, FAT32

Data that can be played: MP3, JPEG, DivX,

SD (Standard Definition)-Video§7, HD (High Definition)-Video§8

DivX

SD (Standard Definition)-Video

HD (High Definition)-Video

MP3

≥If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within a MP3 file,

play may not be possible.

JPEG

≥It may take a few moments for still pictures to display.

≥When there are many files and/or folders, some files may not

display or be playable.

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]

≥Operation may take time to complete when there are many files

(tracks) and/or folders and some files (tracks) may not display or

be playable.

≥English alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly.

Other characters may not be displayed correctly.

≥The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is

displayed on a computer.

≥Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files

(tracks) and folders may not play in the order you numbered them.

≥Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not play.

[Note]

≥Specifications are subject to change without notice.

≥Useable capacity will be less. (SD card)

§1Remove the disc from cartridge case (TYPE1 cannot be used).

§2Finalising is necessary for compatible playback.

§3ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended formats) and Joliet

This unit is compatible with multi-session/border (except for DVD-R DL).

This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.

§4Includes miniSD cards. (A miniSD adaptor needs to be inserted.)

Includes microSD cards. (A microSD adaptor needs to be

inserted.)

§5Long file name is unsupported.

§6Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from SD

card to HDD or DVD-RAM disc.

After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVD-

RAM disc is completed, the playback becomes possible.

§7Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from USB

device to HDD or DVD-RAM disc.

After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVD-

RAM disc is completed, the playback becomes possible.

§8Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from USB

device to HDD, BD-RE (SL/DL) or BD-R (SL/DL) disc.

After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD, BD-RE

(SL/DL) or BD-R (SL/DL) disc is completed, the playback

becomes possible.

§9SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile

§10 Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard established

by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries

Association (JEITA).

Playable

media [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

File format DivX

≥Files must have the

extension “.DIVX”,

“.divx”, “.AVI” or

“.avi”.

Number of

folders Maximum number of folders recognizable : 300

folders

(including the root folder)

Number of

files Maximum number of files recognizable: 200 files

Support

version Certified to the DivX Home Theater Profile.

GMC (Global Motion Compensation) is not

supported. DivX, DivX Certified, and associated

logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used

under license.

Video

– Number of stream: Up to 1

– Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DV50

– Picture size: 32k32 to 720k576

– FPS (Frame Per Second): Up to 30 fps

Audio

– Number of stream: Up to 8

– Format: MP3, MPEG, Dolby Digital

– Multi channel: Dolby Digital is possible. MPEG

multi is 2 ch conversion.

Playable

media [SD]§6 [USB]§7

Codec MPEG2

File Format SD-Video format§9 used on Standard Definition

Camera (Panasonic and some other's)

Playable

media [SD] [USB]§8

Codec MPEG-4 AVC/H.264

File Format AVCHD format conforming

Playable

media [HDD] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

File format MP3

≥Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.

Number of

folders Maximum number of folders recognizable (except

for HDD): 300 folders (including the root folder)

Number of

files (tracks) Maximum number of files recognizable (except for

HDD): 3000 files

Bit rates 32 kbps to 320 kbps

Sampling

frequency 16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz

ID3 tags compatible

Playable

media [HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

[SD]

File format JPEG conforming DCF (Design rule for Camera

File system)§10

≥Files must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.

Number of

pixels Between 34k34 and 8192k8192 pixels

(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)

Thawing Time Approx. 2 sec. in case of SD card (8.1 M pixels,

JPEG)

Number of

folders [CD] Maximum number of folders recognizable: 99

folders (including the root folder)

[HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [USB] [SD]

Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300

folders (including the root folder)

Number of

files [CD] Maximum number of files recognizable: 999

files

[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [USB] [SD] Maximum number of

files recognizable: 3000 files

[HDD] [BD-RE] Maximum number of files

recognizable: 9999 files

MOTION

JPEG

PROGRESSIVE

JPEG

Not supported

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 116 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

117

RQT9434

Reference

∫Structure of folders displayed by this unit

You can play DivX, MP3 and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by making folders as shown below. However depending on the method of

writing data (writing software), play may not be in the order you numbered the folders.

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Structure of MP3, still picture or DivX folders

Prefix with 3-digit numbers in the order you want to play them. Files inside a folder are displayed in the order they were updated or

taken.

[BD-RE] [RAM]

¢¢¢: Numbers XXX: Letters

§1Folders can be created on other equipment. However, these

folders cannot be selected as a copying destination.

≥If a folder name or file name has been input using other

equipment, the name may not be displayed properly or you may

not be able to play or edit the data.

[SD]

¢¢¢: Numbers XXX: Letters

001

001track.mp3

002track.mp3

003track.mp3

001track.mp3

002track.mp3

003track.mp3

001track.mp3

002track.mp3

003track.mp3

004track.mp3

Root

Order of play

(file=track)

001 Folder

002 Folder

003 Folder

MP3

P0000010.jpg

P0000011.jpg

P0000012.jpg

P0000003.jpg

P0000004.jpg

P0000005.jpg

P0000001.jpg

P0000002.jpg

P0000006.jpg

P0000007.jpg

P0000008.jpg

P0000009.jpg

Root

Order of play

002 Folder

003 Folder

004 Folder

Still picture DivX

P0000010.divx

P0000011.divx

P0000012.divx

P0000003.divx

P0000004.divx

P0000005.divx

P0000001.divx

P0000002.divx

P0000006.divx

P0000007.divx

P0000008.divx

P0000009.divx

Root

Order of play

002 Folder

003 Folder

004 Folder

DCIM

JPEG

XXXX



.JPG

XXXX



.JPG

XXXXX

DCIM

XXXX



.JPG

1

Root

MOV



.MOD

PRG



.PGI

MOV



.MOI

SD_VIDEO

001

PRG

XXXX



.JPG

DCIM

P0000001.JPG

P0000002.JPG

XXXXX

MGR_INFO

PRIVATE

AVCHD

Card

Any folder with JPEG files

e.g.,

(Picture folder)

(MPEG2 information folder)

(MPEG2 folder)

(AVCHD folder)

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 117 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

118

RQT9434

Glossary

AVCHD

AVCHD is a new format (standard) for high definition video cameras

that can be used to record and play high-resolution HD images.

BD-J

Some BD-Video discs contain Java applications, and these

applications are called BD-J. You can enjoy various interactive

features in addition to playing normal video.

Bitstream

This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1 channel)

before it is decoded into its various channels.

BONUSVIEW

With the new play function of the BD-Video, you can enjoy the

secondary video recorded on the disc, in addition to the main movie.

CI (Common Interface)

Common Interface is a defined standard, to enable the addition of a

CAM (Conditional Access Module) in a Digital TV/Recorder.

CI Plus

CI Plus is a technical specification that adds additional security and

features to the proven DVB Common Interface Standard that will

allow CI Plus compatible consumer electronics devices, such as

Integrated Digital Televisions and Set Top Boxes, access to a wide

range of Pay TV Services via a Plug-in CI Plus CAM wherever the CI

Plus Technology is supported by the local Pay TV Provider.

CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)

CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to

be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with

CPRM compatible recorders and discs.

Decoder

A decoder restores the coded audio signals on discs to normal. This

is called decoding.

Deep Colour

This unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour) technology

that can reproduce greater colour gradation (4096 steps) when

connected to a compatible TV.

You can enjoy exceptionally rich, natural-looking colours, with

smooth, detailed gradation and minimal colour banding.

[A lower colour gradation (256 steps), without Deep Colour, will be

reproduced if connected to a TV which does not support Deep

Colour. The unit will automatically set appropriate output to suit the

connected TV.]

DiSEqC (Digital Satellite Equipment Control)

Digital Satellite Equipment Control is a control system for selecting

several LNBs at one input.

DivX

DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX

media files contain highly compressed video with high visual quality

that maintains a relatively small file size.

DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance)

DLNA is a standard that makes DLNA Certified digital electronics

easier and more convenient to use on a home network.

DNS Server

A server which acts like a telephone directory and translates Internet

domain names into IP addresses.

Dolby Digital

This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby

Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can

also be multi-channel audio.

Dolby Digital Plus

Multi-channel audio and higher audio quality is made possible using

Dolby Digital Plus. BD-Video supports up to 7.1 channel output.

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is a very high quality audio format that reproduces the

studio master audio. BD-Video supports up to 7.1 channel output.

Down-mixing

This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on

some discs into fewer channels.

DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good

separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are

possible.

DTS-HD

DTS-HD is a high-quality, sophisticated audio format used in movie

theaters. Previous DTS Digital Surround-compatible equipment can

play DTS-HD as DTS Digital Surround audio. BD-Video supports up

to 7.1 channel output.

Dynamic range

Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound

that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest

level of sound before distortion occurs.

Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the

loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low

volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.

Film and video

DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. This unit can

determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable

method of progressive output.

Finalise

A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R,

etc. possible on equipment that can play such media. You can

finalise BD-R, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),

+R, +R DL on this unit.

After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer

record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be formatted for

recording again.

Formatting

Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM

recordable on recording equipment.

You can format BD-RE, DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video

format), +RW, SD cards and the HDD or unused BD-R, +R and

+R DL on this unit.

Formatting permanently deletes all contents.

Frames and fields

Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see

on your television. Each frame consists of two fields.

≥A frame still shows two fields, so there may be some blurring, but

picture quality is generally better.

≥A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but

there is no blurring.

Gateway

IP address of the electronic device providing Internet access.

Usually called a router IP address. (e.g., 192.168.0.1)

HDD (Hard disk drive)

This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk

with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and

a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading

and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)

Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed digital

video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit supports high-

definition video output [720p (750p), 1080i (1125i), 1080p (1125p)]

from HDMI AV OUT terminals. To enjoy high-definition video a high

definition compatible television is required.

IP address

A set of numbers which distinguish each PC on the network when,

for example, connected to the Internet. When using a PC in a LAN to

access a PC or device that is not included in the LAN, the IP address

is called the local IP address. (e.g., 192.168.0.10)

JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)

This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures.

If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc.,

the data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The

benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering

the degree of compression.

LAN (Local Area Network)

A group of linked devices in a company, school or home.

Indicates the boundaries of a particular network.

LNB (Low Noise Block - converter)

This is attached to the satellite dish, which will amplify the weak

signal that was received, lower the frequency, and input into the

tuner.

Local storage

This storage area is used as a destination for sub contents for

playing virtual packages on BD-Video.

Film: Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24

frames per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs

recorded at 30 frames per second as well.)

Generally appropriate for motion picture films.

Video: Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second. (PAL

discs) or 30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs).

Generally appropriate for TV drama programmes or

animation.

Frame Field Field

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 118 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

119

RQT9434

Reference

LPCM (Linear PCM)

These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on

CDs.

MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)

A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.

MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based

digital broadcasting.

MPEG-4 AVC/H.264

A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.

MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 is an encoding method used for recording of

the high definition videos.

MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)

An audio compression method that compresses audio to

approximately one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of

audio quality.

Pan&Scan/Letterbox

In general, BD-Video and DVD-Video are produced with the

intention that they be viewed on a widescreen television (16:9

aspect ratio), so images often don’t fit regular (4:3 aspect ratio)

televisions. Two styles of picture, “Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal

with this problem.

Progressive/Interlace

Interlace is a conventional image signal that displays the image in 2

phases by splitting the display into odd and even scans.

Progressive will display whole image in 1 scan. Therefore, it will give

high definition image without flickering compared with interlace.

Protection

You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or

deletion protection.

RGB

This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G),

and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them.

By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission,

noise is reduced for even higher quality images.

Router

Distinguishes the IP address assigned to each device, such as the

PC, and relays the flow of data within the network.

Sampling frequency

Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave

(analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital

encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per

second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the

original sound.

Signal Quality

This is the guide for checking the aerial direction. The numbered

values displayed do not indicate the strength of the signal, but the

quality of the signal (the signal to noise ratio, or “S/N”). The channels

you can receive are affected by weather conditions, seasons, time

(day/night), region, length of the cable that is connected to the aerial,

etc.

Subnet mask

Enables efficient network use. A set of numbers which identify which

part of the IP address allocated to every device connected to the

router is the network portion.

Thumbnail

This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display

multiple pictures in the form of a list.

Transponder

The signals of a broadcasting station are received by a transponder

on a satellite. The transponder converts them to frequencies and

sends them to satellite dishes near the ground. A transponder can

broadcast several TV and radio programmes or data in parallel.

x.v.ColourTM

x.v.ColourTM is a name for devices that are compatible with the

xvYCC format, an international standard for expanded colour in

motion pictures, and that follow the rules for signal transmission.

You can enjoy vivid colours of wider colour ranges for a more

realistic picture when connected to a TV that supports the

x.v.ColourTM with HDMI cable.

1080i

In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass

every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image. Because

1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of

480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic

and rich image.

1080p

In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the

same time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image.

Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace,

there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.

24p

This is a progressive image recorded at a rate of 24 frames per

second.

720p

In one high definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same

time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image. Since

progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there

is a minimal amount of screen flicker.

Pan & Scan: The sides are cut off so the picture

fills the screen.

Letterbox: Black bands appear at the top and

bottom of the picture so the picture

itself appears in an aspect ratio of

16:9.

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 119 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

120

RQT9434

Safety precautions

Placement

Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high

temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These

conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby

shortening the unit’s service life.

Do not place heavy items on the unit.

Voltage

Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the unit

and cause a fire.

Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when

setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.

AC mains lead protection

Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not

damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or

electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.

Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC

mains lead can cause electric shock.

Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric

shock.

Foreign matter

Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric

shock or malfunction.

Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock or

malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from the

power supply and contact your dealer.

Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain

flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.

Service

Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is

interrupted, indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other

problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect

the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service

centre. Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is

repaired, disassembled or reconstructed by unqualified persons.

Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power

source if it is not to be used for a long time.

Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or

registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United

States and other countries.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942;

5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535;

7,392,195; 7,272,567; 7,333,929; 7,212,872 & other U.S. and

worldwide patents issued & pending.

DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks, & DTS-HD,

DTS-HD Master Audio | Essential and the DTS logos are

trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software.

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is

protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.

Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized

by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited

viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision.

Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

SDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface

are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC

in the United States and other countries.

This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license

and VC-1 patent portfolio license for the personal and

non-commercial use of a consumer to (i) encode video in

compliance with the AVC Standard and VC-1 Standard

(“AVC/VC-1 Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC/VC-1 Video that was

encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and

non-commercial activity and/or was obtained from a video

provider licensed to provide AVC/VC-1 Video. No license is

granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional

information may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC.

See http://www.mpegla.com.

“AVCHD” and the “AVCHD” logo are trademarks of Panasonic

Corporation and Sony Corporation.

HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.

“Blu-ray Disc” is trademark.

“BONUSVIEW” is trademark of Blu-ray Disc Association.

“BD-LIVE” logo is trademark of Blu-ray Disc Association.

DiSEqCTM is a trademark of EUTELSAT.

Plays DivX® video

DivX® is a registered trademark of DivX, Inc., and is used under

license.

x.v.ColourTM is a trademark.

VIERA CASTTM is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.

YouTube and Picasa are trademarks of Google, Inc.

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 120 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

121

RQT9434

Reference

The “CI Plus” Logo is a trademark of CI Plus LLP.

DLNA®, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIEDTM are trademarks,

service marks, or certification marks of the Digital Living Network

Alliance.

This product incorporates the following software:

(1) the software developed independently by or for Panasonic

Corporation,

(2) the software owned by third party and licensed to Panasonic

Corporation,

(3) the software licensed under the GNU General Public License,

Version 2 (GPL v2),

(4) the software licensed under the GNU LESSER General Public

License, Version 2.1 (LGPL v2.1) and/or,

(5) open sourced software other than the software licensed under

the GPL v2 and/or LGPL v2.1

For the software categorized as (3) and (4), please refer to the

terms and conditions of GPL v2 and LGPL v2.1, as the case may

be at

http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl-2.0.html and

http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.

In addition, the software categorized as (3) and (4) are

copyrighted by several individuals. Please refer to the copyright

notice of those individuals at

http://www.am-linux.jp/dl/JPRCBW93

The GPL/LGPL software is distributed in the hope that it will be

useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, without even the implied

warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

At least three (3) years from delivery of products, Panasonic will

give to any third party who contact us at the contact information

provided below, for a charge no more than our cost of physically

performing source code distribution, a complete machine-

readable copy of the corresponding source code covered under

GPL v2/LGPL v2.1.

Contact Information

cdrequest@am-linux.jp

Source code is also freely available to you and any other member

of the public via our website below.

http://www.am-linux.jp/dl/JPRCBW93

The recording and playback of content on this or any other

device may require permission from the owner of the copyright or

other such rights in that content. Panasonic has no authority to

and does not grant you that permission and explicitly disclaims

any right, ability or intention to obtain such permission on your

behalf. It is your responsibility to ensure that your use of this or

any other device complies with applicable copyright legislation in

your country. Please refer to that legislation for more information

on the relevant laws and regulations involved or contact the

owner of the rights in the content you wish to record or playback.

Gracenote® Corporate Description

Music recognition technology and related data are provided by

Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music

recognition technology and related content delivery.

For more information visit www.gracenote.com.

Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote.

The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by

Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.

Gracenote® End-User License Agreement

USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS

BELOW.

Gracenote® Proprietary Legends

2000–2009 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one

or more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680;

#6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,

#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some services

supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent:

#6,304,523.

This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of

Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote (the

“Gracenote Software”) enables this application to perform disc and/or

file identification and obtain music-related information, including name,

artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”) from online

servers or embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote Servers”)

and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by

means of the intended End-User functions of this application or device.

You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,

and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-commercial use

only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote

Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT

TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE

SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS

EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for

statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric

identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without

knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web

page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service.

The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are

licensed to you “AS IS.”

Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied,

regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote

Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the

Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that

Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote

Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of

Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted.

Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or

additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the

future and is free to discontinue its services at any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.

GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE

OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR

ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE

LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES

OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data,

the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you

violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease

any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and

Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the

Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership

rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any

payment to you for any information that you provide. You agree that

Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you

directly in its own name.

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 121 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

122

RQT9434

Index

Adjust the audio quality (Sound menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Adjust the picture quality (Picture menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Album (Music)

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Album (Still picture)

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Audio

Digital broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

AVCHD

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

AV2 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

BD-Live . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

BONUSVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

CAM (Conditional Access Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Channel

Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Chapter Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 90

Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

CI Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 19, 31, 98, 118

Cleaning

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Clock Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 19, 94

Connection

Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 101

Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

COMPONENT VIDEO terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Digital Audio Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

DV input terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 102

Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Set Top Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 100, 102

Video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

VIDEO terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Copy

HD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

SD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 52–58

Copy Title Playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Country setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Deep Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Delete

Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 74

Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

All titles (Discs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

All titles (HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Digital Audio Output settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Digital broadcast

Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

Multi Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 28, 89

Select channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Sub Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 28

Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 28, 89

Update Channel List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

DIRECT NAVIGATOR

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Discs

Disc Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

Discs that cannot be played . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

Discs you can use for recording and play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

Play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

DiSEqC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Display

Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 45, 116, 117, 118

DLNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79, 118

DR (Direct Recording mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

DR File Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Edit

Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 74

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86, 118

Flexible Recording via AV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85, 118

FUNCTION MENU display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Gracenote® Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

HD Video

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

HDD

Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

Handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Connecting with a receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Connecting with a television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17, 102

Settings (HDMI Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 90

HOLD function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116, 117, 118

Language

Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

Disc menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81, 89

On-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81, 89

Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81, 89

Linked timer recordings with external equipment

(Set Top Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

LNB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88, 118

LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92, 119

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 122 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

123

RQT9434

Reference

Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Pop-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Mode

Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

MPEG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Music

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 74

Play (CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Play (MP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Play (Music on HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Name

Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 74

Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Network

Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

DLNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 118

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

One Touch Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

On-screen

Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

VIERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Playing back

BD-Video/DVD-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

HD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Playlist

Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Power Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 119

Properties

Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Protection

Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Ratings level

BD-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

DVD-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Auto Renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

EXT Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Flexible Recording via AV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 35–38

Recording to discs from external equipment

DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Flexible Recording via AV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

SD card

Copy (HD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Copy (SD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Copy (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Play (HD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Play (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

SD Video

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Select channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Smart Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Software (firmware) Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Still picture

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Subtitle

Digital broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Switch the audio/subtitles on the disc (Disc menu) . . . . . . . . 81

Teletext

Digital broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Timer recording

Check, change or delete a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Manual Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Using the TV Guide system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Title

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 52–58

Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Transponder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 119

Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

TV Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 38

TV System (PAL/NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Update Channel List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

USB

Copy (HD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Copy (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Copy (SD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Copy (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Play (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

VIERA CASTTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

VIERA Link (HDAVI Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 102

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 77

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

x.v.ColourTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

2 programmes simultaneous recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 34

DMRBS850&750EG-RQT9434-L_eng.book 123 ページ２０１０年１月１４日　木曜日　午後４時２１分

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products

and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points,

in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.

By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential

negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.

For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your

waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.

Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.

For business users in the European Union

If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.

[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]

These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or

dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.

Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):

This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the

Directive for the chemical involved.

CAUTION!

THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER.

USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR

PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE

SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS

RADIATION EXPOSURE.

DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.

WARNING:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR

PRODUCT DAMAGE,

≥DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN, MOISTURE,

DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND THAT NO OBJECTS

FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES, SHALL BE

PLACED ON THE APPARATUS.

≥USE ONLY THE RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES.

≥DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER (OR BACK); THERE ARE

NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER

SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CAUTION!

≥DO NOT INSTALL OR PLACE THIS UNIT IN A BOOKCASE,

BUILT-IN CABINET OR IN ANOTHER CONFINED SPACE.

ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL VENTILATED. TO PREVENT

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD DUE TO

OVERHEATING, ENSURE THAT CURTAINS AND ANY

OTHER MATERIALS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE

VENTILATION VENTS.

≥DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE UNIT’S VENTILATION OPENINGS

WITH NEWSPAPERS, TABLECLOTHS, CURTAINS, AND

Panasonic DMR BS850 User Manual To The 36d93724 838f 42a0 817c B99d23f84257

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation